JP2017213022A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When BB (any of "BB1" to "BB3") is won, BB kind is not displayed to a put-out number display 16 until a game number for a bonus kind notification determination number (for example, the seventh game when the BB winning game is the zeroth game) passes and, from a main control board 300 to a sub control board 400, only BB winning information (where a second game state is "during BB internal") is transmitted. BB kind information (any of won "BB1", "BB2", and "BB3") is transmitted after a game number for the bonus kind notification determination number passes. In the sub control board 400, continuous performance which is completed before the game number for the bonus kind notification determination number passes after the BB winning is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on a peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, a game medium such as a medal by a player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, “CB (Challenge Bonus)”, “MB (Middle Bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation There are “RT (replay time)” that improves the probability that a re-game where a game is started is determined as a winning combination, “ART (assist replay time)” in which AT and RT operate simultaneously, and so on. The game is played while wishing to shift to a specific state that is advantageous to the player.

The bonus game state as described above is terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. For example, in the conventional gaming machine, when the number of medals paid out reaches “464” during the bonus game state, the game is terminated (see Patent Document 1).
A gaming machine equipped with a plurality of types of bonuses has also been proposed. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a bonus is won, the bonus type won from the main control board is transmitted to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board performs an effect.

JP 2006-271529 A

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in a plurality of games after winning the bonus, the type of bonus or the winning of the bonus itself is not notified, so that the game is improved or the game until the bonus is established is also enjoyed. Even trying to do so has the following problems. For example, since the bonus type won from the main control board to the sub control board is transmitted when the bonus is won, there is a possibility that this information may be obtained illegally. In addition, since the information to be transmitted to the sub control board is to be notified by the main control board, it will be decoded even if the notification method is devised, and it is difficult to improve the interest for the game intended by the development side There is.

  The present invention has been made to solve such a conventional problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation, and the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect based on information transmitted from the main control means by one-way communication. A gaming machine comprising sub-control means for performing control,
The main control means includes a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, and the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol changing means A stop control unit that performs stop control of the symbol that is variably displayed, and whether or not a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed based on the fact that all of the plurality of symbols are stopped by the stop control unit Determining means to perform, a privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege when it is determined by the determining means that a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed, and the winning combination A winning combination information storage means for storing information relating to the special winning combination until it is determined that the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is displayed by the determining means when the special winning combination is determined by the determining means; When the determination means determines that the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is displayed, the state transition means for shifting from the normal state to a special state advantageous to the player is determined by the winning combination determining means. Information transmission means for transmitting information related to the winning combination to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes information receiving means for receiving information transmitted to the information transmitting means, and effect control means for performing effects based on the information received by the information receiving means,
The winning combination determining means determines one of the winning combinations from winning combinations including a plurality of types of the special winning combinations, and the information transmitting means determines which of the special winning combinations is the winning combination determining means. If determined, until the predetermined number of games has elapsed from the determination of the special winning combination to the sub-control means, information indicating the type of the determined special winning combination is not transmitted, The special winning combination winning information indicating that one of a plurality of types of special winning combinations is determined, and when the information receiving unit receives the special winning combination winning information, The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a continuous effect for performing related effects across unit games so as to be completed before the predetermined number of games elapses.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can improve the interest with respect to a game can be provided.

It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet, and the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for RB gaming state in BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the game classification managed by the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a bonus winning time setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a design bit table. It is a figure which shows an example of a grouping data search table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication display information determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication display information determination table at the time of a bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication display form determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 1st, 2nd lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 3rd lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 4th, 5th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 6th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 7th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 8th, 9th, 10th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 11th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 12th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 13th lottery table and a lottery result conversion table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 14th lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication game 15th, 16th, 17th lottery table and a designated value conversion table. It is a figure which shows an example of a subcommand transmission table. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the range lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination counter lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game start management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the subcommand batch transmission process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game display management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning information setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management A process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the inside process of a bonus in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd instruction | indication game 2nd remaining counter special lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the common lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition upper limit confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication state classification lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication state variable lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game management classification lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game classification determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th instruction | indication game 1st remaining counter lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub data subtraction confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the payout process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the bonus display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB operation completion confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during an accessory operation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management B process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management B process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management B process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the bonus end in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the bonus end in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game start time determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED display process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of LED data creation processing for the payout number display device in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control board communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the 2nd game state reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub effect determination processing in a sub control board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display at the time of BB winning, and transmission information. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which performs the fixed display of a bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the case of not performing the confirmation display of a bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which displays the kind of bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the 2nd game state reception in the sub control board | substrate in the case of performing a continuous effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the production which performs a continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board in the case of determining the number of games until bonus classification transmission by lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board in the case of determining the number of games until bonus classification transmission by lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board | substrate when determining the number of games until bonus classification transmission by lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the notification game number command reception in a sub control board.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 in the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external perspective view of the gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet and the back surface of the front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation or a change of a set value indicating a degree advantageous to the player, the unlocking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. Done. Specifically, the door is unlocked by inserting a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Then, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work and work such as setting value change are performed. In addition, when the maintenance work and the work such as the change of the set value are finished, the front door 3 is closed and the door is locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET lever 7)
The BET lever 7 is provided above the keyhole 5 and uses “1” medals among the stored medals when the medal insertion into the gaming machine 1 is permitted. It is provided for. The BET lever 7 is provided to allow the player to operate when a specific effect is performed when the insertion of medals into the gaming machine 1 is not permitted. The BET lever 7 can be rotated from the position shown in FIG. 1 by about “90” degrees in side view.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided at a position spaced to the left of the medal insertion slot 6, and when a medal is allowed into the gaming machine 1, one game (“ It is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in the “1” game) in the game. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the left side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the lower left side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 (to be described later) acquires a random number value and determines the winning combination, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right to be described later. A process for starting the rotation of the reel 20 is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Selector 14)
The selector 14 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 14 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Storage number indicator 15)
The stored number indicator 15 is provided above the settlement button 9. The stored number display 15 is provided to display the number of stored medal (credit) of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 16)
The payout number display 16 is provided below the stored number display 15. The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player, or displays that the game machine 1 is in an error state when the game machine 1 is in an error state. Is provided.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected.

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front, and includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the visual recognition of the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the symbols displayed on the display window 23 are irradiated by emitting a backlight (not shown). .

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. The line that connects the symbols displayed in the lower row with a straight line is the effective line.
In the following, a line connecting the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 20 as an “upper line”. A line connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 20 is called a “middle line”. A line connecting the symbols displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 20 is referred to as a “lower line”. Further, a line connecting the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 20 is called a “right-down line”. A line connecting the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 20 is referred to as a “right-up line”.

(Tray unit 24)
The saucer unit 24 is provided below the front face of the front door 3. In addition, the tray unit 24 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout opening 25 described later.

(Medal payout exit 25)
The medal payout opening 25 is provided below the front door 3 and is provided for discharging a medal paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medal payout is performed. The medal payout opening 25 is inserted when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal by the selector sensor 14s or when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 when a medal is inserted into the slot 6.

(Liquid crystal display device 31)
The liquid crystal display device 31 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, when a state managed by the main control board 300 to be described later is an instruction game (“AT state”), the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a predetermined winning combination, for example, “ When the “batting order bell” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 via an effect control board 500 described later.

(LED32)
The LED 32 is provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the front door 3 and is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs an effect of visually appealing to the player by performing a process of turning on and blinking the LED 32.

(Speaker 33)
The speaker 33 is provided below the back side of the front door 3 and is provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33, thereby performing an effect appealing to the player.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 includes a lever switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 14s described later, a stored number display 15, a payout number display 16, a door open / close sensor 17s, and a main control board 300 described later are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And a main control board 300 to be described later are connected.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected to a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, a main control board 300, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line, and gives a medal to the player. Process to pay out.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the external control terminal board 30, the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400, which will be described later, are connected to the main control board 300. Data (information) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 by one-way communication.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Furthermore, a later-described effect button sensor 21s, a later-described cross key sensor 22s, a power supply board 200, a main control board 300, and a later-described effect control board 500 are connected to the sub-control board 400.

(Production control board 500)
The effect control board 500 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 500 includes an effect control CPU 501 described later, an effect control ROM 502 described later, an effect control RAM 503 described later, a CGROM 504 described later, a sound source IC 505 described later, a sound source ROM 506 described later, and a VDP 507 described later. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the sub control board 400 are connected to the effect control board 500.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Lever switch 7sw)
The lever switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET lever 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a lever switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the BET lever 7 is detected by the lever switch 7sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored medals based on the reception of the lever switch input signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a MAXBET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Then, based on the reception of the MAXBET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “3” medals from the stored medals.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a settlement switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of the adjustment switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a start switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of the start switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a left stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of the left stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits an intermediate stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the intermediate stop button 12 is detected by the intermediate stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of the middle stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a right stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of the right stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 14s)
The selector sensor 14 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a selector sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when an appropriate medal passage is detected by the selector sensor 14s. Then, the main control board 300 receives the selector sensor input signal from the status board 100, and adds “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or the number of medals used in the game. A process of adding “1” is performed.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after a reel index is detected by a left reel sensor 154s described later. .

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after the reel index is detected by the middle reel sensor 155s described later. .

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after a reel index is detected by a right reel sensor 156s described later. .

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Hopper sensor 202s)
The hopper sensor 202s is a sensor for detecting that a medal to be paid out by driving the hopper 202 has passed. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a hopper sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when the hopper sensor 202s detects the payout of medals. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of subtracting the payout number based on the reception of the hopper sensor input signal from the status board 100.

(External concentration terminal board 30)
The external concentrated terminal board 30 is managed by the main control board 300, a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals used in the game, a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, An ART signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the “ART state” described later, a BB signal that can specify that a combination of symbols related to BB described later is displayed, and a combination of symbols related to RB described later are displayed It is provided to transmit an RB signal that can identify the fact and a security signal that can identify that an illegal act has been performed to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown).

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 4) to be described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 5) to be described later, a winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state (see FIG. 7) to be described later, RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 8), first RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, second RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, Third RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 10), a later described fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 11), a later described fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12), and later described. BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 13), BB third RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 14) described later, and BB during BB gaming state winning combination described later. Constant table (see FIG. 15), stores the BB in non RT gaming state for winning combination determination table will be described later (see FIG. 16) or the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters such as a later-described input number counter and various storage areas such as a setting value storage area described later.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production button sensor 21s)
The effect button sensor 21 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect an operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 21 s transmits an effect button sensor input signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the effect button sensor input signal.

(Cross key sensor 22s)
The cross key sensor 22 s is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key sensor 22 s transmits a cross key sensor input signal to the sub-control board 400 based on detecting the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the cross key sensor input signal.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and performs predetermined processing based on command information received from the main control board 300 and signals input from the effect button sensor 21s and the cross key sensor 22s. It is provided for performing calculations and supplying the results of the calculations to the effect control board 500 and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 stores an effect determination table (see FIG. 37) described later.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production control CPU 501)
The effect control CPU 501 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control CPU 501 is provided to read a program stored in an effect control ROM 502 described later and create a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The effect control CPU 501 performs control for causing the liquid crystal display device 31 to display image data stored in a CGROM 504 described later.

(Production control ROM 502)
The effect control ROM 502 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control ROM 502 is provided for storing a control program executed by the effect control CPU 501, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the effect control ROM 502 is a program for control processing of the effect control CPU 501, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying animations, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Production control RAM 503)
The effect control RAM 503 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control RAM 503 functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the effect control CPU 501, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the effect control ROM 502.

(CGROM504)
The CGROM 504 is provided on the effect control board 500. The CGROM 504 includes color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels), and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC505)
The sound source IC 505 is provided on the effect control board 500. The sound source IC 505 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound stored in a sound source ROM 506, which will be described later, and generating a sound signal for driving the speaker 33.

(Sound source ROM 506)
The sound source ROM 506 is provided on the effect control board 500. Further, the sound source ROM 506 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when an effect is executed.

(VDP507)
The VDP 507 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 501. Then, control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed by generating a video signal (for example, LVDS signal or RGB signal) based on the read image data. The VDP 507 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the array data table, “symbol related to red seven”, “symbol related to blue seven”, “symbol related to yellow seven”, “symbol related to black seven”, “Watermelon design”, “Cherry design”, “Bell design”, “Replay design”, “Blank design”, and “Yellow blank design” It is arranged.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and defines the symbol bit name, symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  Here, when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the medal payout, the re-game operation, the bonus operation, the gaming state Control which grants the privilege of transfer is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”.

  In the symbol combination table, the symbol bit name “RBB1” “the symbol combination related to red seven BB”, the symbol bit name “RBB2” “the symbol combination related to blue seven BB”, and the symbol bit name “ “RB3B” “combination of symbols related to Yellow Seven BB”, “bit combination of symbols related to RB” of symbol bit name “RB”, “bit combination of symbols related to normal replay” of symbol bit name “REP01”, “Combination of symbols related to chance replay” with symbol bit name “REP02”, “Combination of symbols with respect to first RT gaming state transition replay” of symbol bit name “REP03”, and “3rd RT of symbol bit name“ REP04 ” “Combination of symbols related to game state transition replay A” and “3rd R” of symbol bit name “REP05” A combination of symbols "according to the playing state transition replay B," a combination of symbols relating to the 4RT game state transition Replay "is defined in the symbol bit name" REP06 ".

  Also, the symbol combination table includes a symbol bit name “NML01” “a symbol combination related to bell”, a symbol bit name “NML02” “a symbol combination related to cherry”, and a symbol bit name “NML03” “ “Combination of symbols related to special role”, “Combination of symbols related to first watermelon” with symbol bit name “NML04”, and “Combination of symbols related to second watermelon” with symbol bit name “NML05” are defined. Yes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “a combination of symbols relating to red seven BB” is displayed on the effective line, the first BB is operated, and “a combination of symbols relating to blue seven BB” is set to the effective line. When displayed above, the operation of the second BB is performed, and when “the combination of symbols related to the yellow seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the operation of the third BB is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the RB operation is performed when “the combination of symbols related to the RB” is displayed on the active line.

  In the present embodiment, “combination of symbols related to normal replay”, “combination of symbols related to chance replay”, “combination of symbols related to first RT gaming state transition replay”, “third RT gaming state transition replay A” When the “combination of symbols related to the 3rd RT gaming state transition replay B” or “combination of symbols related to the 4th RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, The “game” is activated. When the “re-game” operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

In the present embodiment, the “combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay A” and the “combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay B” are collectively referred to as “the third RT gaming state transition replay B”. This is a combination of symbols.
Further, in the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to the commute replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the chance replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay”, and “a third RT gaming state” The “combination of symbols related to transition replay” and the “combination of symbols related to fourth RT gaming state transition replay” are collectively referred to as “combination of symbols related to replay”.

In the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to the first watermelon” and “the combination of symbols related to the second watermelon” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the watermelon”.
In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to bell”, “a combination of symbols related to cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to special roles”, or “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” is on the effective line. When displayed, the medal is paid out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to the bell”, “the combination of symbols related to the cherry”, “the combination of symbols related to the special role”, and “the combination of the symbols related to the watermelon” This is called “combination of symbols related to winning a prize”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 6, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 6, the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the stop operation order are displayed on the active line. The relationship with the combination of symbols to be obtained is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when “Premium Replay” with a winning number “03” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP04” and “REP05”. That is, when “Premium Replay” of the winning number “03” is determined as the winning combination, “Combination of symbols related to 3RT gaming state transition replay A”, “Combination of symbols related to 3RT gaming state transition Replay B” Is allowed to be displayed on the active line.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “3rd RT gaming state fifth replay” of the winning number “09” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” and “REP04”. ”,“ REP05 ”, and“ REP06 ”. In this case, when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, the “combination of symbols related to normal replay” is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time or when the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the combination of symbols related to “4th RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Become.

  In the present embodiment, when the condition device related to the bonus and the other condition device are activated simultaneously, the combination of symbols related to the other condition device is preferentially displayed on the effective line. Will be. For example, in the state of carrying over “BB”, one of “Replay” with a winning number “01” to “10th push order bell” with a winning number “29” was won by an internal lottery process described later. In this case, a combination of symbols other than the “combination of symbols related to BB” is preferentially displayed on the active line.

(Non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “non-RT gaming state” described later. In addition, the non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table defines a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes a “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, a “chance replay” with a winning number “02”, a “premium replay” with a winning number “03”, “Watermelon” with the number “16”, “Cherry” with the winning number “17”, “First special role” with the winning number “18”, “Second special part” with the winning number “19”, and winning The number “20” “first push order bell”, the winning number “21” “second push order bell”, the winning number “22” “third push order bell”, and the winning number “23” “4th push order bell”, winning number “24” “5th push order bell”, winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, and winning number “26” “7th push order” "Bell", "Eighth push order bell" with winning number "27", "9th push order bell" with winning number "28", Selection number “29” “10th push order bell”, winning number “30” “red BB + chance replay”, winning number “31” “red BB + middle cherries”, and winning number “32” “ “Red BB + Watermelon”, “Red BB + Cherry” with winning number “33”, “Red BB + first special role” with winning number “34”, “Red BB + second special role” with winning number “35” The winning number “36” “Blue BB + Chance Replay”, the winning number “37” “Blue BB + Middle Cherry”, the winning number “38” “Blue BB + Watermelon”, and the winning number “39” “Blue” “BB + Cherry”, “Blue BB + first special role” with winning number “40”, “Blue BB + second special role” with winning number “41”, “Yellow BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “42” , "Yellow BB + middle cherries" with winning number "43" The winning number “44” “Yellow BB + Watermelon”, the winning number “45” “Yellow BB + Cherry”, the winning number “46” “Yellow BB + first special role”, and the winning number “47” A lottery value is defined for “yellow BB + second special combination”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the winning number “04” “2nd RT gaming state replay” and the winning “05” first replay for 3RT gaming state, “06” “second replay for 3RT gaming state”, and “3rd RT gaming state third replay” for winning number “07” ”,“ 4th replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 08 ”,“ 5th replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 09 ”, and“ 4th RT gaming state with winning number “10”. "First replay for", "second replay for 4RT gaming state" with winning number "11", "third replay for fourth RT gaming state" with winning number "12", and "3rd replay for winning state" 13 " 4th Replay for 4RT gaming state "and this And the number "14" of "the 4RT fifth replay for a game state", the "middle cherry" winning numbers "15", "RB" will not be determined as a winning combination of winning numbers "48".

In addition, in the description of the winning combination, those displayed using the addition symbol “+” indicate that each winning combination has been won. For example, “red BB + chance replay” with a winning number “30” indicates that “red BB” and “chance replay” have been won.
In this embodiment, “first push order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, and “fifth push order bell” And "sixth push order bell", "seventh push order bell", "eighth push order bell", "9th push order bell", and "tenth push order bell" It is called “push order bell” or simply “bell”.
The “first special role” and the “second special role” are collectively referred to as “special role”.

Also, “first replay for 3RT gaming state”, “second replay for 3RT gaming state”, “third replay for 3RT gaming state”, “fourth replay for 3RT gaming state”, “The third RT gaming state replay” is collectively referred to as “the third RT gaming state replay”.
Also, “first replay for 4RT gaming state”, “second replay for fourth RT gaming state”, “third replay for fourth RT gaming state”, “fourth replay for fourth RT gaming state”, The “fourth RT gaming state replay” is collectively referred to as “fourth RT gaming state replay”.

“Red BB”, “blue BB”, and “yellow BB” are collectively referred to as “BB”.
Also, “normal replay”, “chance replay”, “premium replay”, “second RT gaming state replay”, “third RT gaming state replay”, and “fourth RT gaming state replay” are collectively referred to. This is called “replay”.

(First RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RT gaming state” described later. In the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  The winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes a “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, a “chance replay” of the winning number “02”, a “premium replay” of the winning number “03”, and the winning “Watermelon” with the number “16”, “Cherry” with the winning number “17”, “First special role” with the winning number “18”, “Second special part” with the winning number “19”, and winning The number “20” “first push order bell”, the winning number “21” “second push order bell”, the winning number “22” “third push order bell”, and the winning number “23” “4th push order bell”, winning number “24” “5th push order bell”, winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, and winning number “26” “7th push order” "Bell", "Eighth push order bell" with winning number "27", "9th push order bell" with winning number "28" The winning number “29” “10th push order bell”, the winning number “30” “red BB + chance replay”, the winning number “31” “red BB + middle cherry”, and the winning number “32” “ “Red BB + Watermelon”, “Red BB + Cherry” with winning number “33”, “Red BB + first special role” with winning number “34”, “Red BB + second special role” with winning number “35” The winning number “36” “Blue BB + Chance Replay”, the winning number “37” “Blue BB + Middle Cherry”, the winning number “38” “Blue BB + Watermelon”, and the winning number “39” “Blue” “BB + Cherry”, “Blue BB + first special role” with winning number “40”, “Blue BB + second special role” with winning number “41”, “Yellow BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “42” , "Yellow BB + middle cherries with winning number" 43 " The winning number “44” “Yellow BB + Watermelon”, the winning number “45” “Yellow BB + Cherry”, the winning number “46” “Yellow BB + first special role”, and the winning number “47” A lottery value is defined for “yellow BB + second special combination”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number “04” “Replay for second RT gaming state” and the winning “05” first replay for 3RT gaming state, “06” “second replay for 3RT gaming state”, and “3rd RT gaming state third replay” for winning number “07” ”,“ 4th replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 08 ”,“ 5th replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 09 ”, and“ 4th RT gaming state with winning number “10”. "First replay for", "second replay for 4RT gaming state" with winning number "11", "third replay for fourth RT gaming state" with winning number "12", and "3rd replay for winning state" 13 " “4th Replay for 4RT gaming state”, Select number of "14" and "the first 4RT fifth replay for a game state", the "middle cherry" winning numbers "15", "RB" will not be determined as a winning combination of winning numbers "48".

(2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RT gaming state” described later. In the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “replay for second RT gaming state” with the winning number “04”, “watermelon” with the winning number “16”, and “cherry” with the winning number “17”. The winning number “18”, the “first special role”, the winning number “19”, the “second special role”, the winning number “20”, the “first push order bell”, and the winning number “21” “2nd push order bell”, “3rd push order bell” of winning number “22”, “4th push order bell” of winning number “23”, and “5th push order” of winning number “24” "Bell", "6th push order bell" with winning number "25", "7th push order bell" with winning number "26", "8th push order bell" with winning number "27" “No. 9 push order bell” with the number “28”, “No. 10 push order bell” with the winning number “29”, and “Red BB +” with the winning number “30”. "Replay", "Red BB + middle cherry" with winning number "31", "Red BB + watermelon" with winning number "32", "Red BB + cherry" with winning number "33", and winning number "34" “Red BB + 1st Special Role”, “Red BB + 2nd Special Role” with winning number “35”, “Blue BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “36”, “Blue BB + Middle” with winning number “37” “Cherry”, “Blue BB + Watermelon” with winning number “38”, “Blue BB + Cherry” with winning number “39”, “Blue BB + first special role” with winning number “40”, and winning number “41” "Blue BB + second special role", winning number "42" "Yellow BB + Chance Replay", winning number "43" "Yellow BB + middle stage cherry", winning number "44" "Yellow BB + watermelon" ”And“ Yellow BB ”with winning number“ 45 ” And Cherry ", and" yellow BB + first special role "of the winning number" 46 ", lottery value to" yellow BB + second special role "of the winning number" 47 "are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “normal replay” with the winning number “01” and the winning number “02”. “Chance Replay”, “Premium Replay” with a winning number “03”, “First Replay for 3RT gaming state” with a winning number “05”, and “No. 3RT gaming state No. with a winning number“ 06 ”. "2 Replays", "3rd Replay for 3RT gaming state" with winning number "07", "4th Replay for 3RT gaming state" with winning number "08", and "3rd RT with winning number" 09 " "5th replay for gaming state", "1st replay for 4RT gaming state" with winning number "10", "2nd replay for 4RT gaming state" with winning number "11", and winning number "12" "4th RT gaming state for the second "Replay", "Fourth Replay for 4th RT gaming state" with winning number "13", "Fifth Replay for fourth RT gaming state" with winning number "14", and "Middle tier cherry" with winning number "15" Then, “RB” of the winning number “48” is not determined as the winning combination.

(3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The third RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RT gaming state” described later. In the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  The winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “first replay for third RT gaming state” with a winning number “05”, and “06” with a winning number “06”. “Second Replay for 3RT gaming state”, “Third Replay for third RT gaming state” with winning number “07”, “Fourth Replay for third RT gaming state” with winning number “08”, and Winning number “ "09", "5th replay for 3RT gaming state", "Watermelon" with winning number "16", "Cherry" with winning number "17", and "First special role" with winning number "18" The “second special role” with the winning number “19”, the “first pushing order bell” with the winning number “20”, the “second pushing order bell” with the winning number “21”, and the winning number “22”. "3rd push order bell" and win number "23" 4th push order bell and win No. “24” “5th push order bell”, winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, winning number “26” “7th push order bell”, and winning number “27” “8th push order bell”, “9th push order bell” with winning number “28”, “10th push order bell” with winning number “29”, and “red BB + chance replay” with winning number “30” ”,“ Red BB + Cherry ”with the winning number“ 31 ”,“ Red BB + Watermelon ”with the winning number“ 32 ”,“ Red BB + Cherry ”with the winning number“ 33 ”, and“ "Red BB + 1st Special Role", "Red BB + 2nd Special Role" with winning number "35", "Blue BB + Chance Replay" with winning number "36", and "Blue BB + Middle Cherry" with winning number "37" "," Blue BB + watermelon "with winning number" 38 "and" Blue BB "with winning number" 39 " “Cherry”, “Blue BB + first special role” with winning number “40”, “Blue BB + second special role” with winning number “41”, “Yellow BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “42”, “Yellow BB + Cherry” with winning number “43”, “Yellow BB + watermelon” with winning number “44”, “Yellow BB + cherry” with winning number “45”, “Yellow BB + No. Lottery values are defined for “1 special combination” and “yellow BB + second special combination” of the winning number “47”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the case of performing the lottery using the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the “chance replay” of the winning number “02” and the winning number “03” "Premium Replay", winning number "04" "Second RT gaming state replay", winning number "10" "fourth RT gaming state first replay", and winning number "11" "4th RT" "Second Replay for gaming state", "Third Replay for fourth RT gaming state" with winning number "12", "Fourth Replay for fourth RT gaming state" with winning number "13", and Winning number "14" “5th replay for 4RT gaming state”, “middle cherry” of winning number “15”, and “RB” of winning number “48” are not determined as winning combinations.

(Winning role determination table for 4th RT gaming state)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “4RT gaming state” described later. In the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “first replay for 4RT gaming state” of the winning number “10”, and “11” of the winning number “11”. “4th RT gaming state second replay”, winning number “12” “fourth RT gaming state third replay”, winning number “13” “fourth RT gaming state fourth replay” and winning number “12” 14 ”“ 5th Replay for 4RT gaming state ”,“ Watermelon ”with winning number“ 16 ”,“ Cherry ”with winning number“ 17 ”,“ First special role ”with winning number“ 18 ” The “second special role” with the winning number “19”, the “first pushing order bell” with the winning number “20”, the “second pushing order bell” with the winning number “21”, and the winning number “22”. "3rd push order bell" and win number "23" 4th push order bell and win No. “24” “5th push order bell”, winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, winning number “26” “7th push order bell”, and winning number “27” “8th push order bell”, “9th push order bell” with winning number “28”, “10th push order bell” with winning number “29”, and “red BB + chance replay” with winning number “30” ”,“ Red BB + Cherry ”with the winning number“ 31 ”,“ Red BB + Watermelon ”with the winning number“ 32 ”,“ Red BB + Cherry ”with the winning number“ 33 ”, and“ "Red BB + 1st Special Role", "Red BB + 2nd Special Role" with winning number "35", "Blue BB + Chance Replay" with winning number "36", and "Blue BB + Middle Cherry" with winning number "37" "," Blue BB + watermelon "with winning number" 38 "and" Blue BB "with winning number" 39 " “Cherry”, “Blue BB + first special role” with winning number “40”, “Blue BB + second special role” with winning number “41”, “Yellow BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “42”, “Yellow BB + Cherry” with winning number “43”, “Yellow BB + watermelon” with winning number “44”, “Yellow BB + cherry” with winning number “45”, “Yellow BB + No. Lottery values are defined for “1 special combination” and “yellow BB + second special combination” of the winning number “47”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when performing the lottery using the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table, “chance replay” of the winning number “02” and the winning number “03” “Premium Replay”, “Replay for 2nd RT Game State” with Winning Number “04”, “1st Replay for 3RT Game State” with Winning Number “05”, “3rd RT” with Winning Number “06” "Second Replay for gaming state", "Third Replay for third RT gaming state" with winning number "07", "Fourth Replay for third RT gaming state" with winning number "08", and Winning number "09" “5th replay for 3RT gaming state”, “middle tier cherry” with winning number “15”, and “RB” with winning number “48” are not determined as winning combinations.

(5th RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in “5th RT gaming state” described later. In the fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Also, the winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “chance replay” with a winning number “02”, “middle cherry” with a winning number “15”, “Watermelon” with the number “16”, “Cherry” with the winning number “17”, “First special role” with the winning number “18”, “Second special part” with the winning number “19”, and winning The number “20” “first push order bell”, the winning number “21” “second push order bell”, the winning number “22” “third push order bell”, and the winning number “23” “4th push order bell”, winning number “24” “5th push order bell”, winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, and winning number “26” “7th push order” "Bell", winning number "27" "Eighth pushing order bell", winning number "28" "9th pushing order bell", winning No. lottery value to "the 10 press the order bell" of "29" are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state, “Premium Replay” with the winning number “03” and the winning number “04”. "Second RT gaming state replay", winning number "05" "third RT gaming state first replay", winning number "06" "third RT gaming state second replay", and winning number " “3rd replay for 3RT gaming state” with “07”, “4th replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “08”, and “5th replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “09” The winning number “10” “4th RT gaming state first replay”, the winning number “11” “fourth RT gaming state second replay”, and the winning number “12” “fourth RT gaming state number 1”. 3 replays ”and winning number“ 1 ” "4th RT Replay for 4RT gaming state", "5th Replay for 4RT gaming state" with winning number "14", "Red BB + Chance Replay" with winning number "30" and Winning number "31" "Red BB + middle cherries", winning number "32" "Red BB + watermelon", winning number "33" "Red BB + cherry" and winning number "34" "Red BB + first special role" The winning number “35” “red BB + second special role”, the winning number “36” “blue BB + chance replay”, the winning number “37” “blue BB + middle cherry”, and the winning number “38”. "Blue BB + Watermelon", winning number "39" "Blue BB + Cherry", winning number "40" "Blue BB + first special role", winning number "41" "Blue BB + second special" "Position" and "Yellow BB + Chan" with winning number "42" “Replay”, “Yellow BB + Cherry” with winning number “43”, “Yellow BB + watermelon” with winning number “44”, “Yellow BB + cherry” with winning number “45”, and winning number “46” “Yellow BB + first special combination”, “Yellow BB + second special combination” with the winning number “47”, and “RB” with the winning number “48” are not determined as the winning combination.

(Winning role determination table for 2nd RT gaming state during BB)
Next, based on FIG. 13, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB will be described.

  The BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB second RT gaming state” described later. In the BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB includes “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “chance replay” with a winning number “02”, and “middle cherries” with a winning number “15”. The winning number “16” “watermelon”, the winning number “17” “cherry”, the winning number “18” “first special role”, and the winning number “19” “second special role” The winning number “20” “first pushing order bell”, the winning number “21” “second pushing order bell”, the winning number “22” “third pushing order bell”, and the winning number “23”. "4th pushing order bell" of winning number "24", "5th pushing order bell" of winning number "25", "6th pushing order bell" of winning number "25", and "7th pushing order bell" of winning number "26" “Push order bell”, “Eighth push order bell” with winning number “27”, “Ninth push order bell” with winning number “28” Winning numbers lottery value to "the 10 press the order bell" of "29" are defined.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the case of performing the lottery using the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB, “Premium Replay” of the winning number “03” and the winning number “ "04" 2nd RT gaming state replay, winning number "05" 3rd RT gaming state 1st replay, winning number "06" 3rd RT gaming state 2nd replay, and winning “3rd Replay for 3rd RT gaming state” with number “07”, “4th Replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “08”, and “5th Replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “09” ”,“ First replay for 4th RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 10 ”,“ second replay for 4th RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 11 ”, and“ 4th RT gaming state with winning number “12”. 3rd replay "and winning numbers “Fourth Replay for 4th RT gaming state” of “13”, “Fifth Replay for fourth RT gaming state” of winning number “14”, “Red BB + Chance Replay” of winning number “30”, and Winning number “Red BB + Cherry” of “31”, “Red BB + Watermelon” of winning number “32”, “Red BB + Cherry” of winning number “33”, “Red BB + 1st special” of winning number “34” “Winner”, “Red BB + second special role” with winning number “35”, “Blue BB + Chance Replay” with winning number “36”, “Blue BB + Cherry” with winning number “37”, and winning number “Blue BB + Watermelon” of “38”, “Blue BB + Cherry” of winning number “39”, “Blue BB + first special role” of winning number “40”, “Blue BB + No. 1” of winning number “41” 2 special roles ”and“ Yellow BB + ”with winning number“ 42 ” “Replay”, “Yellow BB + Cherry” with winning number “43”, “Yellow BB + watermelon” with winning number “44”, “Yellow BB + cherry” with winning number “45”, and winning number “46” “Yellow BB + first special combination”, “Yellow BB + second special combination” with the winning number “47”, and “RB” with the winning number “48” are not determined as the winning combination.

(Winning role determination table for 3rd RT gaming state during BB)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state during BB will be described based on FIG.

  The third RT gaming state winning combination determination table for BB is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RT gaming state during BB” described later. In the BB third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state during the BB includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “chance replay” of the winning number “02”, and “third RT gaming state of the winning number“ 05 ”. "First replay for", "second replay for 3RT gaming state" with winning number "06", "third replay for 3RT gaming state" with winning number "07", and "third replay for winning state" with "08" “4th replay for 3RT gaming state”, “5th replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “09”, “middle stage cherry” with winning number “15”, and “watermelon” with winning number “16” “Cherry” with the winning number “17”, “First special part” with the winning number “18”, “Second special part” with the winning number “19”, and “First” with the winning number “20”. "Push order bell" and winning number "21" "Second push order bell" Winning number “22” “3rd pushing order bell”, winning number “23” “4th pushing order bell”, winning number “24” “5th pushing order bell”, and winning number “25” “6th push order bell”, win number “26” “7th push order bell”, win number “27” “8th push order bell” and win number “28” “9th push order” Lottery values are defined for “order bell” and “tenth push order bell” of the winning number “29”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state in the BB, the “Premium Replay” of the winning number “03” and the winning number “ 04 ”“ 2nd RT gaming state replay ”, winning number“ 10 ”“ 4th RT gaming state replay ”, winning number“ 11 ”“ 4th RT gaming state replay ”, and winning “Fourth RT gaming state replay” with the number “12”, “Fourth RT gaming state fourth replay” with the winning number “13” and “Fourth RT gaming state fifth replay” with the winning number “14” ”,“ Red BB + Chance Replay ”with the winning number“ 30 ”,“ Red BB + Middle Cherry ”with the winning number“ 31 ”,“ Red BB + Watermelon ”with the winning number“ 32 ”, and the winning number“ 33 ”. "Red BB + cherry" The winning number “34” “Red BB + first special role”, the winning number “35” “red BB + second special role”, the winning number “36” “blue BB + chance replay”, and the winning number “ 37 “Blue BB + Middle Cherry”, Winning Number “38” “Blue BB + Watermelon”, Winning Number “39” “Blue BB + Cherry”, and Winning Number “40” “Blue BB + First Special Role” ”,“ Blue BB + second special role ”with a winning number“ 41 ”,“ Yellow BB + Chance Replay ”with a winning number“ 42 ”,“ Yellow BB + Cherry ”with a winning number“ 43 ”, and a winning number“ 44 ”“ Yellow BB + Watermelon ”, winning number“ 45 ”“ Yellow BB + Cherry ”, winning number“ 46 ”“ Yellow BB + first special role ”, winning number“ 47 ”“ Yellow BB + second ” "Special role" and winning number "48" "RB" are selected as winning roles Is is it is not.

(Winning role determination table for RB gaming state during BB)
Next, based on FIG. 15, the winning combination determination table for the BB gaming state for BB will be described.

  The BB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB RB gaming state” described later. In addition, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state during BB defines the winning number, the contents of the winning number, and the lottery value for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. Illustration of a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state in the BB includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “chance replay” of the winning number “02”, “premium replay” of the winning number “03”, Winning number “15” “middle tier cherry”, winning number “16” “watermelon”, winning number “17” “cherry”, winning number “18” “first special role”, and winning number “19” “second special role”, winning number “20” “first pushing order bell”, winning number “21” “second pushing order bell”, winning number “22” “second” “3 push order bell”, “4th push order bell” with winning number “23”, “5th push order bell” with winning number “24”, and “6th push order bell” with winning number “25” And "7th push order bell" of winning number "26" and "8th push order bell" of winning number "27" Winning numbers of "28" and "9 press the order bell", lottery value to the "10 press the order bell" winning numbers "29" are defined.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when performing a lottery using the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state during BB, “Replay for second RT gaming state” with the winning number “04”, Winning number “05” “3rd RT gaming state first replay”, winning number “06” “third RT gaming state second replay”, and winning number “07” “third RT gaming state 3rd replay” "Replay", "Fourth Replay for 3RT gaming state" with winning number "08", "Fifth Replay for third RT gaming state" with winning number "09", and "Fourth RT game with winning number" 10 " “First replay for state”, “second replay for fourth RT gaming state” with winning number “11”, “third replay for fourth RT gaming state” with winning number “12”, and winning number “13” “4th Replay for 4RT gaming state” Winning number “14” “4th RT gaming state 5th replay”, winning number “30” “red BB + chance replay”, winning number “31” “red BB + middle cherry” and winning number “32” "Red BB + watermelon", winning number "33" "Red BB + cherry", winning number "34" "Red BB + first special role", winning number "35" "Red BB + second special" "Position", "Blue BB + Chance Replay" with winning number "36", "Blue BB + Middle Cherry" with winning number "37", "Blue BB + Watermelon" with winning number "38", and Winning number "39" “Blue BB + Cherry”, winning number “40” “Blue BB + first special role”, winning number “41” “Blue BB + second special role”, and winning number “42” “Yellow BB + Chance” "Replay" and winning number "43" "Yellow BB “Cherry Berry”, “Yellow BB + Watermelon” with winning number “44”, “Yellow BB + Cherry” with winning number “45”, “Yellow BB + first special role” with winning number “46”, and winning number “ 47 "Yellow BB + second special combination" and "RB" of the winning number "48" are not determined as winning combinations.

(Winning role determination table for non-RT gaming state during BB)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB will be described based on FIG.

  The BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB non-RT gaming state” described later. In the BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, contents of the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “chance replay” of the winning number “02”, and “premium replay” of the winning number “03”. Winning number “15” “middle tier cherry”, winning number “16” “watermelon”, winning number “17” “cherry”, winning number “18” “first special role”, winning “Second special role” with the number “19”, “first push order bell” with the winning number “20”, “second push order bell” with the winning number “21”, and “ “3rd push order bell”, win number “23” “4th push order bell”, win number “24” “5th push order bell” and win number “25” “6th push order bell” ”,“ 7th push order bell ”with winning number“ 26 ”, and“ 8th push order bell ”with winning number“ 27 ” , As "the 9 press the order bell" winning numbers "28", as "the 10 press the order bell" winning numbers "29", lottery value to "RB" of the winning number "48" are defined.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the winning number “04” “second RT gaming state replay” is set. , “First replay for 3RT gaming state” with winning number “05”, “second replay for third RT gaming state” with winning number “06”, and “third RT gaming state for first RT” with winning number “07”. 3 Replay ”,“ 4th Replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 08 ”,“ 5th Replay for 3RT gaming state ”with winning number“ 09 ”, and“ 4th RT for winning number “10”. "First Replay for gaming state", "Second Replay for 4th RT gaming state" with winning number "11", "Third Replay for 4th RT gaming state" with winning number "12", and Winning number "13" "4th Replay for 4RT gaming state" The winning number “14” is “5th replay for 4th RT gaming state”, the winning number “30” is “red BB + chance replay”, the winning number “31” is “red BB + middle cherry”, and the winning number “ “Red BB + Watermelon” of “32”, “Red BB + Cherry” of winning number “33”, “Red BB + first special role” of winning number “34”, “Red BB + No. 2” of winning number “35” "Special Actor", "Blue BB + Chance Replay" with winning number "36", "Blue BB + Middle Cherry" with winning number "37", "Blue BB + Watermelon" with winning number "38", and Winning number "39" "Blue BB + Cherry", winning number "40" "Blue BB + first special role", winning number "41" "Blue BB + second special role", and winning number "42" "Yellow BB +" “Chance Replay” and winning number “43” “Yellow B + Middle tier cherry, winning number “44” “yellow BB + watermelon”, winning number “45” “yellow BB + cherry”, winning number “46” “yellow BB + first special role”, and winning number “47” “Yellow BB + second special combination” is not determined as the winning combination.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, based on FIG. 17, a gaming state transition diagram will be described.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, in the case where the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state” and “BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “non-RT gaming state” to “fifth RT gaming” Transition to "state".

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state”, and “BB” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “first RT gaming state” to the “fifth RT gaming state” " Further, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state” and the “third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “first RT gaming state” to the “third RT gaming state” are displayed. It is transferred to.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state” and the “third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming state” to the “third RT gaming state” are displayed. It is transferred to.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “third RT gaming state” and the “fourth RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “fourth RT gaming state” to the “third RT gaming state” It is transferred to.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “fourth RT gaming state” and the “first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “fourth RT gaming state” to the “first RT gaming state” are displayed. It is transferred to.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “fifth RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming during BB” is changed from the “fifth RT gaming state”. Transition to "state".

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state during BB” and the medals are paid out in excess of the preset number “53” that can be acquired during the BB, The “game state” is shifted to the “second RT game state”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “the second RT gaming state during BB”, “RB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and “the combination of symbols related to RB” is on the active line. If not displayed, the state shifts from the “second RT gaming state during BB” to the “third RT gaming state during BB”. Further, when the current gaming state is “the second RT gaming state during BB”, when “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming state during BB” is changed from “BB Transition to “medium RB gaming state”.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is “the third RT gaming state during BB”, when the medals exceeding the preset number “53” that can be acquired during the BB are paid out, The “game state” is shifted to the “third RT game state”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “the third RT gaming state during BB”, when “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, the “third RT gaming state during BB” is changed from “BB Transition to “medium RB gaming state”.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is “BB RB gaming state”, “combination of winning symbols” is displayed “4 times” on the active line, or “4 times” game is played. In the case of being lost, the state is shifted from “BB RB gaming state” to “BB non-RT gaming state”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “BB in-RB gaming state”, when medals are paid out in excess of the preset number of “53” that can be acquired in BB, the “BB in-RB gaming state” To “non-RT gaming state”.

  Further, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB” and “combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, “BB non-RT gaming state during BB” is changed to “BB Transition to “medium RB gaming state”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB”, “RB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and “combination of symbols related to RB” is on the active line. If not displayed, the state shifts from “non-RT gaming state during BB” to “third RT gaming state during BB”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB”, and a payout of medals exceeding the preset number of “53” that can be acquired during BB is made, The “game state” is shifted to the “non-RT game state”.

(Game types managed by the main control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the main control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the main control board 300 are provided separately from the gaming states such as “first RT gaming state” and “third RT gaming state during BB”. Specifically, in the present embodiment, “first normal”, “second normal”, “medium in the first”, “medium in the second”, “first actuating operation”, “second actuating” A total of “10” states are defined: “operation”, “third action act”, “first instruction game”, “second instruction game”, “third instruction game”, “fourth instruction game”. Yes.

(First normal, second normal)
“First normal” and “second normal” are disadvantageous for the player. Note that “first normal” and “second normal” are collectively referred to as “normal state”.

(1st inside, 2nd inside)
“Inside the first” and “inside the second” are states in which, for example, a transition is made by winning a bonus, which is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “normal state”. Note that “first internal state” and “second internal state” are collectively referred to as “internal state”.

(First actor action, second actor action, third actor action)
“First character operation”, “second character operation”, and “third character operation” are states that shift after passing the “internal state”, which is more advantageous to the player than the “normal state”. It is a state. In addition, “first accessory operation”, “second accessory operation”, and “third actor operation” are collectively referred to as “actual operation state”.

(First instruction game, second instruction game, third instruction game, fourth instruction game)
“First instruction game”, “second instruction game”, “third instruction game”, “fourth instruction game” are, for example, a state in which a transition is made after going through an “inner state”, and “push order bell” Since the operation order is notified, the “push order bell” is more advantageous to the player than the “normal state” in which the operation order is not notified. The “first instruction game”, “second instruction game”, “third instruction game”, and “fourth instruction game” are collectively referred to as “instruction game state”.

(Bonus winning setting table)
Next, the bonus winning time setting table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The bonus winning time setting table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used to obtain the first gaming state, the bonus type, and the stop control number from the winning number when the bonus is won. Here, in the bonus winning time setting table, a stop control number and bonus winning value information are defined for each winning number. The first gaming state and the bonus type are obtained from bonus winning value information.

(Design bit table)
Next, the symbol bit table will be described with reference to FIG.

The symbol bit table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when setting symbols that can be displayed. Here, in the symbol bit table, a corresponding symbol bit is defined for each winning number.
The symbol bit table includes a first symbol bit table (see FIG. 20A), a second symbol bit table (see FIG. 20B), and a third symbol bit table (see FIG. 20C). doing.
The first symbol bit table is for designating display permission symbol bits for the first group relating to “replay”. The second symbol bit table is for designating display permission symbol bits for the second group relating to symbol combinations related to winning, so-called small roles. The third symbol bit table is for designating display permission symbol bits for the 0th group related to the bonus.

(Grouping data search table)
Next, the grouping data search table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The grouping data search table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used for obtaining the first winning area information, the second winning area information, and the second area type from the stop control number. Here, in the grouping data search table, the first winning area information, the second winning area information, and the second area type are defined for each stop control number.

(Instruction display information determination table)
Next, the instruction display information determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction display information determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is a table used when obtaining instruction monitor display information based on a game type and a stop control number (information of winning combination). The instruction monitor display information is information related to the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 displayed on the payout number display 16.

The instruction display information determination table includes an instruction display information determination table selection table (see FIG. 22A), a first instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22B), and a second instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22). 22 (C)).
Based on the instruction display information determination table selection table, either the first instruction display information determination table or the second instruction display information determination table is selected as the instruction display information determination table to be referred to depending on the game type, and the selected first The instruction monitor display information is determined by the stop control number based on the instruction display information determination table or the second instruction display information determination table.

(Bonus instruction display information determination table)
Next, the bonus instruction display information determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The bonus instruction display information determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when the instruction monitor display information is obtained according to the bonus type at the time of a bonus. Note that, under predetermined conditions at the time of bonus, information indicating the type of bonus is displayed on the payout number display 16 by the instruction monitor display information.

(Instruction display form determination table)
Next, the instruction display form determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction display form determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the instruction display form. Here, the instruction display form determination table defines an instruction display type and an instruction display form corresponding to this instruction display type.

(Instruction game first lottery table)
Next, the instruction game first lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game first lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and used when the instruction state flag is lottery. Here, in the instruction game lottery first table, a lottery value is defined for each winning number corresponding to the instruction state.

(Instruction game second lottery table)
Next, the instruction game second lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The instruction game second lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is provided for performing a lottery of instruction states in the first normal state and the second normal state. Here, in the instruction game second lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each of the instruction state flag, the first winning area information, and the instruction state flag winning value. Then, the instruction game second lottery table determines whether or not to perform the lottery based on the instruction state flag and the first winning area information, and when performing the lottery, selects one of the instruction state flag winning values based on the lottery value. Will be.

(Instruction game third lottery table)
Next, the instruction game third lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The instruction game third lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is provided for performing the addition determination lottery of the remaining counter (the number of addition games of the instruction game). Here, in the instruction game third lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each of the instruction state flag, the second winning area information, and the set value. Then, the instruction game third lottery table determines whether or not to perform the lottery based on the instruction state flag and the second winning area information, and when performing the lottery, whether or not the lottery is performed is determined by the set value.

(Instruction game fourth lottery table, instruction game fifth lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the instruction game fourth lottery table (see FIG. 27A) and the instruction game fifth lottery table (see FIG. 27B) will be described.

  The instructed game fourth lottery table and the instructed game fifth lottery table are stored in the main ROM 302 and are provided for performing a winning / no-win lottery process based on the second winning area information. Here, in the instruction game fourth lottery table and the instruction game fifth lottery table, lottery values are defined for each second winning area information. When “255” is defined as the lottery value (the second winning area information is the middle cherry “4”), the winning is made regardless of the acquired random number value.

(Instruction game sixth lottery table)
Next, the instruction game sixth lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game sixth lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for drawing the instruction game management type. Here, in the instruction game sixth lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each instruction state management type for each instruction state variable (mode).

(Instruction game seventh lottery table)
Next, the instruction game seventh lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game seventh lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for performing the addition counter determination lottery. Here, in the designated game seventh lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each designated game management type and second winning area information.

(Instruction game eighth lottery table, instruction game ninth lottery table, instruction game tenth lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 30, the designated game eighth lottery table (see FIG. 30A), the designated game ninth lottery table (see FIG. 30B), and the designated game tenth lottery table (FIG. 30). (C) will be described.

  The instruction game eighth lottery table, the instruction game ninth lottery table, and the instruction game tenth lottery table are stored in the main ROM 302 and are provided for lottery of the instruction game type. Here, in the designated game eighth lottery table, the designated game ninth lottery table, and the designated game tenth lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each winning type for each set value.

(Instruction game eleventh lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 31, the instruction game eleventh lottery table will be described.

  The instruction game eleventh lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for lottery of the instruction state variable (mode). Here, in the instruction game eleventh lottery table, lottery values are defined for each mode for each set value.

(Instruction game twelfth lottery table)
Next, the instruction game twelfth lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game twelfth lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for lottery of the number of remaining counters to be added. Here, in the instruction game twelfth lottery table, lottery values for each additional value are defined for each second winning area information.

(Instruction game 13th lottery table, lottery result conversion table)
Next, based on FIG. 33, an instruction game 13th lottery table (FIG. 13A) and a lottery result conversion table (FIG. 13B) will be described.

The instruction game thirteenth lottery table and the lottery result conversion table are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when the value of the winning combination counter (number of chance replay ceilings) is lottery. Here, in the instruction game 13th lottery table, a lottery value is assigned for each winning number. In the lottery result conversion table, conversion values are assigned for each search number.
For the value of the winning combination counter, the winning number is drawn using the instructed game 13th lottery table, and then the winning number determined by the lottery in the instructed game 13th lottery table is searched using the lottery result conversion table. The conversion value is obtained as a number.

(Instruction game 14th lottery table)
Next, the instruction game 14th lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game 14th lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is provided for lottery of addition / non-acquisition of the remaining counter. Here, the instruction game 14th lottery table defines lottery values for each second winning area information for each set value.

(Instruction game 15th lottery table, instruction game 16th lottery table, instruction game 17th lottery table, specified value conversion table)
Next, based on FIG. 35, an instruction game 15th lottery table (see FIG. 35A), an instruction game 16th lottery table (see FIG. 35B), an instruction game 17th lottery table (FIG. 35C )) And the specified value conversion table (see FIG. 35D) will be described.

The instruction game 15th lottery table, the instruction game 9th lottery table, the instruction game 10th lottery table, and the designated value conversion table are stored in the main ROM 302, and are provided for lottery of the addition number of the remaining counter. Yes. Here, in the designated game 15th lottery table, the designated game 16th lottery table, and the designated game 17th lottery table, lottery values for each designated value are defined for each second winning area information. In the designated value conversion table, the number of additions is defined for each designated value.
The number of additions of the remaining counter is determined using the designated game 15th lottery table, the designated game 9th lottery table, or the designated game 10th lottery table, and then the designated value lottery table. The addition number is determined from the specified value determined by the lottery.

(Subcommand transmission table)
Next, subcommand transmission will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sub-command transmission table is stored in the main ROM 302, and commands for transmitting from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 are set. The subcommand transmission table includes a first subcommand transmission table (FIG. 36A), a second subcommand transmission table (FIG. 36B), and a third subcommand transmission table according to the transmission timing. (FIG. 36C) is provided. Here, the number of transmission commands to be transmitted and the command to be transmitted are specified in the subcommand transmission table.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the main control board 300 are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes the normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 37A) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the main control. The BB state effect determination table (see FIG. 37 (B)) used when the state managed by the substrate 300 is the “working object operating state”, and the state managed by the main control substrate 300 is the “internal state”. In the bonus non-notification effect determination table (see FIG. 37 (C)) used when the bonus winning is not notified, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “internal state”, and the bonus winning has been notified. The bonus-notified effect determination table (see FIG. 37 (D)) used in this case and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “in-medium state”. The bonus type non-notification effect determination table (see FIG. 37 (E)) used when the eggplant type is not notified, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “internal state” and the bonus type has been notified. The bonus type notification effect determination table (see FIG. 37 (F)) used in the case and the ART state effect determination table (FIG. 37) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “instruction game state”. (Not shown).

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change. If it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and if it is determined that the setting change key switch is not ON (step S3). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer. When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first acquires the current setting value based on the value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether the setting value range is normal. If the result of the determination is normal, the current setting value is displayed on a setting display section (not shown). On the other hand, when the above-described determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of switching the set value based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button (not shown) by the setting change switch (not shown), and the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw. Based on the detected operation, a process for determining the set value is performed. Then, the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change, and has been turned a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction from the state rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined angle. When it is detected, processing for storing the set value in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game first lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game first lottery table as a table to be referred to by a range lottery process described later. Then, when the process of step S5 ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random number value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in a range lottery process described later. Then, when the process of step S6 ends, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S7)
In step S <b> 7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “2” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” as the number of times of lottery by a range lottery process described later. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs a range lottery process which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the set table and performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the acquired random number value, and performs processing for acquiring a winning value. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning number in the instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the winning number won in the range lottery process in an instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S <b> 10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the specified instruction state flag holding prescribed number in the effect state first counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “20”, which is the prescribed number of instruction state flags, to be stored in an effect state first counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination counter lottery process which will be described later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing a value to be set in the winning combination counter (number of chance replay ceilings). Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 41).

(Range lottery process)
Next, the range lottery process performed by the process of step S5 of FIG. 38 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of range lottery processing.

(Step S8-1)
In step S8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value of the corresponding table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 corresponds to a lottery value at a corresponding position in the table set before the range lottery process is called, for example, if the range lottery process is called and is the first process. A process of acquiring the top lottery value of the table is performed. Then, when the process of step S8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-2.

(Step S8-2)
In step S8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the acquired lottery value is “255”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery value acquired in the process of step S8-1 is “255”. If it is determined that the acquired lottery value is “255” (step S8-2 = Yes), the range lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and it is determined that the acquired lottery value is not “255”. If (step S8-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S8-3.

(Step S8-3)
In step S8-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for substituting a value obtained by subtracting the lottery value from the random value into the random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the acquired lottery value from the value of the register storing the random number value and rewriting the value of the register storing the random value. Then, when the process of step S8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-4.

(Step S8-4)
In step S8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the random number value is less than “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the random number value is less than “0” by the process of step S8-3. If it is determined that the random number value is less than “0” (step S8-4 = Yes), the range lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the random value is determined not to be less than “0”. (Step S8-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S8-5.

(Step S8-5)
In step S8-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for moving the reference field. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for moving the reference column of the corresponding table to the next line. Then, when the process of step S8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-6.

(Step S8-6)
In step S8-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the register in which the number of lotteries is stored. Then, when the process of step S8-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-7.

(Step S8-7)
In step S8-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the register in which the number of lotteries is stored has become “0” by the process of step S8-6. When it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S8-7 = Yes), the subroutine of the range lottery process is terminated, and when it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0”. (Step S8-7 = No), the process proceeds to Step S8-1.

(Prize winning counter lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the winning combination counter lottery process performed by the process of step S11 of FIG. 38 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine of a winning combination counter lottery process.

(Step S11-1)
In step S <b> 11-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game thirteenth lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game thirteenth lottery table as a table to be referred to in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-2.

(Step S11-2)
In step S11-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S11-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S11-3.

(Step S11-3)
In step S11-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5” as the number of times of lottery in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-4.

(Step S11-4)
In step S11-4, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the set table and performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the acquired random number value, and performs processing for acquiring a winning value. Then, when the process of step S11-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-5.

(Step S11-5)
In step S11-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning number as a search number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the winning number acquired in the range lottery process in the search number register as a search number for obtaining a conversion value to be described later. Then, when the process of step S11-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-6.

(Step S11-6)
In step S <b> 11-6, the main CPU 301 refers to the lottery result conversion table and performs a process of acquiring a conversion value using a search number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to a lottery result conversion table provided in the main ROM 302 and performs a process of acquiring a conversion value based on the value of the search number register. Then, when the process of step S11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-7.

(Step S11-7)
In step S11-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the acquired conversion value in the winning combination counter storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the acquired conversion value in a winning combination counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S11-7 is completed, the winning combination counter lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop processing performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process which will be described later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a later-described re-game operating flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, the process of adding the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the operation of the BET lever 7 and the MAXBET button 8 are detected, and the operation of the BET lever 7 and the MAXBET button 8 is determined. Is detected, the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, a process of returning the stored medal to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S <b> 104, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S102 and the medal management process in step S103. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S104 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105, where it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In this case (step S104 = No), the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw, and is provided in the main RAM 303 when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The processing for turning off the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 10 is not detected by the start switch 10sw, the start lever check process is terminated. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106 = No), The process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination determination table (FIG. 7) provided in the main ROM 302 based on the value of the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the previous RT state storage area. (See FIG. 16). Next, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination (winning number) based on the random number value stored in the random number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the selected winning combination determining table. I do. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described later with reference to FIGS. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 displayed on the payout number display 16. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs a winning information setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning area information, the second winning area information, the second area type, and the like based on the stop control number. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start preparation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing the spinning effect based on information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed as a result of the determination, the minimum game time has elapsed in the next game. In order to determine whether or not it has been performed, a process of setting a value of a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. The main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all stopped by the reel rotation process in step S112. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S113 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S113 = No), The process proceeds to step S112, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sends the display determination command to the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a display determination command having information on the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line, and determines that “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a game, a process for calculating the number of medals to be paid out to the player is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to winning” is not displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine whether or not the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line, a process of turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the value of the number of payouts in a predetermined register in the display determination process in step S <b> 114, so that the value of the register in which the value of the number of payouts is stored The storing process is performed in the sheet counter. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the fact that “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S101.

(Game start management process)
Next, based on FIG. 42, the game start management process performed by the process of step S102 of FIG. 41 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of game start management processing.

(Step S102-1)
In step S102-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the number of inserted sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the inserted number storage area provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S102-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-2.

(Step S102-2)
In step S102-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a third subcommand transmission table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the third subcommand transmission table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table used in subcommand batch transmission processing described later. Then, when the process of step S102-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3.

(Step S102-3)
In step S102-3, the main CPU 301 performs a subcommand batch transmission process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command specified in the set table. Then, when the process of step S102-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-4.

(Step S102-4)
In step S102-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for substituting the current RT state for the previous RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for substituting the value of the current RT state storage area provided in the main ROM 302 into the previous RT state storage area provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S102-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-5.

(Step S102-5)
In step S102-5, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON. When the process of step S102-5 is completed, the game start management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S103 of the main loop process.

(Subcommand batch transmission processing)
Next, the subcommand batch transmission process performed by the process of step S102-3 in FIG. 42 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of subcommand batch transmission processing.

(Step S102-3-1)
In step S102-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of transmissions. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the set subcommand transmission table, acquires the number of transmission commands, and performs a process of storing it in the transmission number register. Then, when the process of step S102-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-2.

(Step S102-3-2)
In step S102-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the command acquisition position to the first. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the top command line of the set subcommand transmission table as the command acquisition position. Then, when the process of step S102-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-3.

(Step S102-3-3)
In step S102-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a command at the set position. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a command specified at a set position in the subcommand transmission table. Then, when the process of step S102-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-4.

(Step S102-3-4)
In step S102-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the command specified in the process of step S102-3-3 in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission port buffer for the sub control board 400) provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the setting process. The command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 in an interrupt process described later. Then, when the process of step S102-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-5.

(Step S102-3-5)
In step S102-3-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for subtracting the number of transmissions. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the transmission number register. Then, when the process of step S102-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-6.

(Step S102-3-6)
In step S102-3-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining number of transmissions is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the transmission number register subtracted by the subtraction process is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the transmission number register is “0” (step S102-3-6 = Yes), the subcommand batch transmission process is terminated, and the value of the transmission number register is “0”. When it is determined that it is not “” (step S102-3-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S102-3-7.

(Step S102-3-7)
In step S102-3-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for moving the command acquisition position. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for moving the command acquisition position of the set subcommand transmission table from the current acquisition position to the next position (lower row). Then, when the process of step S102-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3-3.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S108 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIGS. 44 to 46 are diagrams showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for temporarily setting a stop control number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the winning number acquired in the internal lottery process in the stop control number register for storing the stop control number. The value stored in the stop control number register is set in the stop control number storage area of the main RAM 303 when the stop control number is determined. Then, when the process of step S108-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-2.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the acquired winning number is a winning number in the bonus winning area. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S108-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-3. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S108-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S108-15.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 acquires the stop control number and the value of bonus winning value information. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the stop control number and the value of bonus winning value information based on the winning number based on the bonus winning time setting table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 19). . Then, when the process of step S108-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the acquired bonus winning value information in the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-5.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a bonus type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the acquired bonus winning value information in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-6.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for temporarily setting a stop control number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the acquired stop control number in the stop control number register. Then, when the process of step S108-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-7.

(Step S108-7)
In step S108-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is an RB winning. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first game state storage area is a value “5” indicating that the inside of the RB in the BB. If it is determined that the RB is won (step S108-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-12, and if it is determined that the RB is not selected (step S108-7). = No), the process proceeds to step S108-8.

(Step S108-8)
In step S108-8, the main CPU 301 performs temporary setting processing for the next game type and the current RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “2” indicating the first internal state in the next game type register and setting a value “5” indicating the fifth RT state in the current RT state register. . Then, when the process of step S108-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-9.

(Step S108-9)
In step S108-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the game type storage area is a value “0” indicating the first normal gaming state or a value “1” indicating the second normal gaming state. Determine. And when it determines with it being a 1st normal game state or a 2nd normal game state (step S108-9 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S108-11, and a 1st normal game state and a 2nd normal game state If it is determined that the game state is not set (step S108-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-10.

(Step S108-10)
In step S108-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “3” indicating the second inside in the next game type register. Then, when the process of step S108-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-11.

(Step S108-11)
In step S108-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value stored in the next game type register in a next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-14.

(Step S108-12)
In step S108-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a bonus type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-13.

(Step S108-13)
In step S108-13, the main CPU 301 performs a temporary setting process in the current RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “3” indicating the third RT state in the current RT state register. Then, when the process of step S108-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-14.

(Step S108-14)
In step S108-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the current RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value stored in the current RT state register in a current RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-15.

(Step S108-15)
In step S108-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stop control number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value stored in the stop control number register in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-16.

(Step S108-16)
In step S108-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a winning time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the acquired stop control number is a number corresponding to winning. When it is determined that it is a winning time (step S108-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-19, and when it is determined that it is not a winning time (step S108-16 = No). ), And the process proceeds to step S108-17.

(Step S108-17)
In step S108-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring symbol bits for the first group (replay). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a symbol bit by a winning number based on a first symbol bit table (see FIG. 20A) provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S108-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-18.

(Step S108-18)
In step S108-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first group of display permission symbol bits. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the acquired symbol bits in the first group of display permission symbol bit storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-21.

(Step S108-19)
In step S108-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring symbol bits for the second group (small role). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a symbol bit by a winning number based on a second symbol bit table (see FIG. 20B) provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S108-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-20.

(Step S108-20)
In step S108-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the second group of display permission symbol bits. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the acquired symbol bits in the second group of display permission symbol bit storage areas provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-21.

(Step S108-21)
In step S108-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring symbol bits for the third group (bonus). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring symbol bits according to the bonus type based on a third symbol bit table (see FIG. 20C) provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S108-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-22.

(Step S108-22)
In step S108-22, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the 0th group of display permission symbol bits. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the logical sum of the acquired symbol bits and the symbol bits of the 0th group in the display permission symbol bit storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and Processing for setting to the 0th group is performed. Then, when the process of step S108-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-23.

(Step S108-23)
In step S108-23, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a drawing target symbol bit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores all (from the 0th group) stored in the display permission symbol bit storage area in the drawing target symbol bit storage area (from the 0th group to the 2nd group) provided in the main RAM 303. A process of setting a value of (second group) is performed. Then, when the process of step S108-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-24.

(Step S108-24)
In step S108-24, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting display symbols for each effective line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the initial symbol bits “0FFH” in all the display symbol bit storage areas for each effective line provided in the main RAM 303 (for the number of valid lines). Then, when the process of step S108-24 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-25.

(Step S108-25)
In step S108-25, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the second gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the first game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the second game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-25 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-26.

(Step S108-26)
In step S108-26, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number is greater than or equal to the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the effect state second counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than the bonus type notification determination number “7”. If it is determined that the value in the effect state second counter storage area is equal to or greater than the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-26 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-29. If it is determined that the bonus type notification determination number is not equal to or greater than “7” (step S108-26 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-27.

(Step S108-27)
In step S108-27, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is in the BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the value of the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” in the BB1, “2” in the BB2, or “3” in the BB3. It is determined whether or not there is. When it is determined that the value of the first game state storage area is “1” inside BB1, “2” inside BB2, or “3” inside BB3 (step S108-27 = Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S108-28, and it is determined that the value of the first game state storage area is not any of "1" in the BB1, "2" in the BB2, and "3" in the BB3. (Step S108-27 = No), the process proceeds to Step S108-29.

(Step S108-28)
In step S108-28, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the second gaming state to “7” inside the BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 collects the BB1 inside, the BB2 inside, and the BB3 inside in the second gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, which BB (BB1, A process of setting a value “7” indicating the inside of the BB, in which it is impossible to determine whether it is BB2 or BB3). Then, when the process of step S108-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-29.

(Step S108-29)
In step S108-29, the main CPU 301 performs a reliability command transmission set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reliability command including information on the second gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reliability command to the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S108-29 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-30.

(Step S108-30)
In step S108-30, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command transmission set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command including information on the number of inserted sheets in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the command to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S108-30 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-31.

(Step S108-31)
In step S108-31, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game display management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting instruction monitor display information to be displayed on the payout number display 16. Then, when the process of step S108-31 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-32.

(Step S108-32)
In step S108-32, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an instruction display form. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the instruction type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 (the above instruction game display management process) based on the instruction display form determination table (see FIG. 24) provided in the main ROM 302. The instruction display type is acquired based on the value of the instruction display type acquired in step 1). Then, when the process of step S108-32 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-33.

(Step S108-33)
In step S108-33, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction display form. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the acquired instruction display form in the acquired number counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-33 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-34.

(Step S108-34)
In step S108-34, the main CPU 301 performs IF data transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit information such as a gaming state and a stop control number to the test apparatus. Then, when the process of step S108-34 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-35.

(Step S108-35)
In step S108-35, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the second combination operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “5” indicating the second actor action. When it is determined that the value of the game type storage area is the value “5” indicating the second actor action (step S108-35 = Yes), the symbol code setting process subroutine is terminated, The process proceeds to step S109 of the loop process, and if it is determined that the value is not “5” indicating the second accessory operation (step S108-35 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-36.

(Step S108-36)
In step S108-36, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the reel effect permission flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a reel effect permission flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. When it is determined that the reel effect permission flag is on (step S108-36 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-37, and when it is determined that the reel effect permission flag is not on. (Step S108-36 = No), the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to Step S109 of the main loop process.

(Step S108-37)
In step S108-37, the main CPU 301 performs a production fifth timer wait process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 waits for a transition to the next process until the reel production waiting time elapses. Then, when the process of step S108-37 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-38.

(Step S108-38)
In step S108-38, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reel effect permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the reel effect permission flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-38 is completed, the symbol code setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Instruction game display management process)
Next, based on FIG. 47, the instruction game display management process performed by the process of step S108-31 of FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction game display management processing.

(Step S108-31-1)
In step S108-31-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “losing” has occurred due to the internal lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. And when it is determined that it is “losing” (step S108-31-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-31-6, and when it is determined that it is not “losing” ( Step S108-31-1 = No) and the process proceeds to Step S108-31-2.

(Step S108-31-2)
In step S108-31-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “BB game state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “4” indicating “BB general gaming state”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the game state is the “BB general game state” (step S108-31-2 = Yes), the instruction game display management process subroutine is terminated, and the symbol code setting process step S108-32 is executed. If it is determined that the game state is not “BB general gaming state” (step S108-31-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-31-3.

(Step S108-31-3)
In step S <b> 108-31-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the presentation state second counter is less than the push order non-display determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the presentation state second counter provided in the main RAM 303 is less than the push order non-display determination number “4”. If it is determined that the value of the effect state second counter is less than the pressing order non-display determination number “4” (step S108-31-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-31-4. If it is determined that the value of the effect state second counter is not less than the push order non-display determination number “4” (step S108-31-3 = No), the instruction game display management process subroutine is terminated. Thus, the process proceeds to step S108-32 of the symbol code setting process.

(Step S108-31-4)
In step S108-31-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for selecting an instruction display information determination table to be referred to. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses an instruction display information determination table selection table (see FIG. 22A) provided in the main ROM 302 as an instruction display information determination table to be referenced according to the current game type. The first instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22B) or the second instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22C) is selected. Then, when the process of step S108-31-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-31-5.

(Step S108-31-5)
In step S108-31-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring instruction monitor display information. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays an instruction display information determination table (first instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22B)) or second instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22) provided in the selected main ROM 302. 22 (C))), the process of acquiring the instruction monitor display information by the stop control number is performed. Then, when the process of step S108-31-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-31-9.

(Step S108-31-6)
In step S <b> 108-31-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “RB inside”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “4” indicating “inside RB”. . If it is determined that “inside the RB” (step S108-31-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-31-8, and is determined not to be “inside the RB”. In this case (step S108-31-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-31-7.

(Step S108-31-7)
In step S108-31-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect state second counter is less than the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the presentation state second counter provided in the main RAM 303 is less than the bonus type notification determination number “7”. When it is determined that the value of the performance state second counter is less than the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-31-7 = Yes), the subroutine of the instruction game display management process is ended. When the process proceeds to step S108-32 of the symbol code setting process and it is determined that the value of the effect state second counter is not less than the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-31-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-31-8.

(Step S108-31-8)
In step S108-31-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring instruction monitor display information. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring instruction monitor display information according to the bonus type based on a bonus instruction display information determination table (see FIG. 22) provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S108-31-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-31-9.

(Step S108-31-9)
In step S108-31-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the acquired instruction monitor display information in the instruction type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-31-9 ends, the instruction game display management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108-32 of the symbol code setting process.

(Winning information setting process)
Next, the winning information setting process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 48 shows a subroutine for winning information setting processing.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the first winning area information, the second winning area information, and the second area type based on the stop control number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the grouping data search table provided in the main ROM 302 and uses the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to determine the first winning area information. The second winning area information and the second area type are acquired. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning area information and the second winning area information. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value of the acquired first winning area information in the first winning area information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the second winning area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of setting the value of the acquired second winning area information in the information storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the second area type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the acquired second area type value in the second area type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game state management A process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery of designated games, an addition process of a remaining counter, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first subcommand transmission table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first subcommand transmission table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table used in the subsequent subcommand batch transmission processing. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs the sub-command batch transmission process described above. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command specified in the set table. When the process of step S109-6 is completed, the winning information setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Instruction game state management A process)
Next, the instruction game state management A process performed by the process of step S109-4 of FIG. 48 will be described based on FIGS. 49 to 55 are diagrams showing a subroutine of instruction game state management A processing.

(Step S109-4-1)
In step S109-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the first normal game or the second normal game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates that the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating the first normal game or indicates the second normal game. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “1” is performed. If it is determined that the game type is the first normal game or the second normal game (step S109-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-2, and the game type is the first game type. If it is determined that the game is not the first normal game and the second normal game (step S109-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-31.

(Step S109-4-2)
In step S109-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a normal game number counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the normal game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-3.

(Step S109-4-3)
In step S109-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a subtraction process for the effect state first counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the presentation state first counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-4.

(Step S109-4-4)
In step S109-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “chance replay” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating “chance replay”. . If it is determined that “chance replay” has been won (step S109-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-5, and “chance replay” has not been won. If it is determined (step S109-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-6.

(Step S109-4-5)
In step S109-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination counter subtraction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning combination counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-6.

(Step S109-4-6)
In step S109-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “Premium Replay” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “3” indicating “premium replay”. . If it is determined that “Premium Replay” has been won (Step S109-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S109-4-23, and “Premium Replay” has not been won. If it is determined (step S109-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-7.

(Step S109-4-7)
In step S109-4-7, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the RT state is “RT3”, “RT4”, or “RT5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the current RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than the value “3” indicating “RT3”. . If it is determined that the RT state is “RT3”, “RT4”, or “RT5” (step S109-4-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-17. When it is determined that the RT state is not “RT3”, “RT4”, and “RT5” (the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1”, or “RT2”) (step S109-4-7). = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-8.

(Step S109-4-8)
In step S109-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs reference area selection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the instruction game second lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, indicates the instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the first winning area information storage area, Thus, a process of selecting a reference area (lottery range) of a table used in the range lottery process in step S109-4-12 described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-9.

(Step S109-4-9)
In step S109-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is out of the lottery target. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the selected reference area is outside the lottery target in the reference area selection process of step S109-4-9. If it is determined that it is not a lottery target (step S109-4-9 = Yes), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process. However, if it is determined that it is not a lottery target (step S109-4-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-10.

(Step S109-4-10)
In step S109-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-11.

(Step S109-4-11)
In step S109-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” as the number of lotteries performed by the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-12.

(Step S109-4-12)
In step S109-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set reference area of the table, performs the lottery for the number of lottery times using the acquired random number value, and performs a process for acquiring the winning value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-13.

(Step S109-4-13)
In step S109-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the promotion is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction state flag acquired by the range lottery process is larger than the value of the instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the promotion is won (step S109-4-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-15, and if it is determined that the promotion is not selected (step S109). -4-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-14.

(Step S109-4-14)
In step S109-4-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect state first counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the presentation state first counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the production state first counter is “0” (step S109-4-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-16, where the production state first counter If it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S109-4-14 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process. Transition.

(Step S109-4-15)
In step S109-4-15, the main CPU 301 performs initial setting of the effect state first counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction state flag holding prescribed number “20” in the effect state first counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-16.

(Step S109-4-16)
In step S109-4-16, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction state flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction state won in the range lottery process on an instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-20.

(Step S109-4-17)
In step S109-4-17, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the previous RT state is “RT3” or “RT4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has a value “3” indicating “RT3” or a value “4” indicating “RT4” stored in the previous RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that the previous RT state is “RT3” or “RT4” (step S109-4-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-18, and the previous RT state is determined. Is not “RT3” and “RT4” (the previous RT state is “RT5”) (step S109-4-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-20. .

(Step S109-4-18)
In step S109-4-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third instruction state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating the “third instruction state”. When it is determined that the state is the third instruction state (step S109-4-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-20, and when it is determined that the state is not the third instruction state. (Step S109-4-18 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-4-19.

(Step S109-4-19)
In step S109-4-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second instruction state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “1” indicating a “second instruction state” in an instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-20.

(Step S109-4-20)
In step S109-4-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “middle cherry” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “15” indicating “middle cherry”. . If it is determined that the “middle cherry” is won (step S109-4-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21, and the “middle cherry” is not won. If it is determined (step S109-4-20 = No), the instructed gaming state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-21)
In step S109-4-21, the main CPU 301 performs bonus internal / intermediate processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the value of the performance state second counter. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-22.

(Step S109-4-22)
In step S109-4-22, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the effect state second counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the effect state second counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-22 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-23)
In step S109-4-23, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” in the second instruction game second remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the number of premier lip setting “2”, which is the initial setting number when “premium replay” is won, in the second instruction game second remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-24.

(Step S109-4-24)
In step S109-4-24, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” in the second instruction game third remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the number of premier lip setting “2”, which is the initial setting number when “premium replay” is won, in the second instruction game third remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-24 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25.

(Step S109-4-25)
In step S109-4-25, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game initial setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game initial setting process and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-26.

(Step S109-4-26)
In step S109-4-26, the main CPU 301 sets the third instruction game as the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “9” indicating the third instruction game in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-27.

(Step S109-4-27)
In step S109-4-27, the main CPU 301 sets the third instruction state type as the instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “2” indicating the third instruction state type in the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-27 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-31)
In step S109-4-31, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is in the first internal or the second internal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates that the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the value “2” indicating the first internal state, or indicates the second internal state. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “3” is performed. If it is determined that the game type is in the first internal or the second internal (step S109-4-31 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-32, and the game type is the first. When it is determined that the inside of the 1st inside and the inside of the second inside are not found (step S109-4-31 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-41.

(Step S109-4-32)
In step S109-4-32, the main CPU 301 performs bonus internal / intermediate processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the value of the performance state second counter. When the process of step S109-4-32 ends, the instruction game state management A process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-41)
In step S109-4-41, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the first combination operation, the second combination operation, or the third combination operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates that the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the value “4” indicating the first action item operation, or indicates the second action item operation. A process of determining whether the value is “5” or the value “6” indicating the third accessory operation is performed. If it is determined that the game type is the first combination operation, the second combination operation, or the third combination operation (step S109-4-41 = Yes), step S109-4-42 is performed. If it is determined that the game type is not the first combination operation, the second combination operation, or the third combination operation (step S109-4-41 = No), step S109 is performed. The process proceeds to -4-101.

(Step S109-4-42)
In step S109-4-42, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “lost”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating “losing”. If it is determined that the game is “lost” (step S109-4-42 = Yes), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process. However, when it is determined that it is not “losing” (step S109-4-42 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-43.

(Step S109-4-43)
In step S109-4-43, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the third accessory operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “6” indicating the third accessory action. . If it is determined that the game type is the third character operation (step S109-4-43 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-91, and the game type is the third character operation. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S109-4-43 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-44.

(Step S109-4-44)
In step S109-4-44, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the general-purpose state management flag is off. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the general-purpose state management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” indicating OFF. If it is determined that the general-purpose state management flag is off (step S109-4-44 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-45, and it is determined that the general-purpose state management flag is not off. If it is determined (step S109-4-44 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-71.

(Step S109-4-45)
In step S109-4-45, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the first combination act. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “4” indicating the first action item operation. . If it is determined that the game type is the first action (step S109-4-45 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-51, and the game type is the first action. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S109-4-45 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-61.

(Step S109-4-51)
In step S109-4-51, the main CPU 301 performs reference area selection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the instruction game third lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, indicates the instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the second winning area information storage area, Thus, a process of selecting a reference area (lottery range) of a table used in the lottery process in step S109-4-53 described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-51 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-52.

(Step S109-4-52)
In step S109-4-52, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is not subject to lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the selected reference area is outside the lottery target (winning confirmation) in the reference area selection process in step S109-4-51. If it is determined that it is not a lottery target (step S109-4-52 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-73, and if it is determined that it is not a lottery target ( The process proceeds to step S109-4-52 = No) and step S109-4-53.

(Step S109-4-53)
In step S109-4-53, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process based on the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the selected reference area in the instruction game third lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, and performs a pass / fail lottery process according to the set value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-53 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-54.

(Step S109-4-54)
In step S109-4-54, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is made in the lottery process. When it is determined that the lottery process is won (step S109-4-54 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-73, and when it is determined that the lottery process is not won. (Step S109-4-54 = No), the instruction game state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-61)
In step S109-4-61, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game fifth lottery table (see FIG. 27B). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game fifth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent common lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-61 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-62.

(Step S109-4-62)
In step S109-4-62, the main CPU 301 performs a common lottery process to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set lottery table and performs a lottery process based on the value of the second winning area information. Then, when the process of step S109-4-62 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-63.

(Step S109-4-63)
In step S109-4-63, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not winning is performed in the common lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). If it is determined that the common lottery process has been won (step S109-4-63 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-73, and it is determined that the common lottery process has not been won. In this case (step S109-4-63 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-71)
In step S109-4-71, the main CPU 301 performs a second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for lottery of the remaining counter addition. Then, when the process of step S109-4-71 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-72.

(Step S109-4-72)
In step S109-4-72, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not winning is made in the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). Process. And when it determines with having won in the 2nd instruction | indication game 2nd remaining counter special lottery process (step S109-4-72 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-4-73 and a 2nd instruction | indication game When it is determined that the second remaining counter special lottery process is not won (step S109-4-72 = No), the instructed gaming state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the winning information setting process step S109- The processing is shifted to 5.

(Step S109-4-73)
In step S109-4-73, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “1” as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and sets the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be added. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-73 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-74.

(Step S109-4-74)
In step S109-4-74, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-74 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-75.

(Step S109-4-75)
In step S109-4-75, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the general-purpose state management flag to ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a general-purpose state management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-75 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-76.

(Step S109-4-76)
In step S109-4-76, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the second combination operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “5” indicating the second character action. If it is determined that the game type is the second combination operation (step S109-4-76 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-77, and the game type is the second combination operation. If it is determined that it is not (step S109-4-76 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-77)
In step S109-4-77, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game ninth lottery table (see FIG. 30B). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game ninth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent instruction state type lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-77 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-78.

(Step S109-4-78)
In step S109-4-78, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the special bonus flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a special bonus flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. If it is determined that the special bonus flag is on (step S109-4-78 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-79, and it is determined that the special bonus flag is not on. In this case (step S109-4-78 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-80.

(Step S109-4-79)
In step S109-4-79, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game tenth lottery table (see FIG. 30C). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game tenth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the instruction state type lottery process in the subsequent stage. Then, when the process of step S109-4-79 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-80.

(Step S109-4-80)
In step S109-4-80, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction state type lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set lottery table and performs a lottery process for the instruction state type. Then, when the process of step S109-4-80 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-81.

(Step S109-4-81)
In step S109-4-81, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a higher ranking. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third instruction state type or the second instruction state type is won in the instruction state type lottery process. If it is determined that the top winning is not determined in the instruction state type lottery process (step S109-4-81 = Yes), the instruction game state management A process subroutine is terminated and step S109 of the winning information setting process is completed. The process is shifted to −5, and when it is determined that the higher ranking is won in the instruction state type lottery process (step S109-4-81 = No), the process is shifted to step S109-4-82.

(Step S109-4-82)
In step S109-4-82, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel effect permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0FFH” in a reel effect permission flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-82 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-83.

(Step S109-4-83)
In step S109-4-83, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the instruction state type has been promoted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state type selected in the instruction state type lottery is larger than the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the instruction state type has been promoted (step S109-4-83 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-84, and it is determined that the instruction state type has not been promoted. If it is determined (step S109-4-83 = No), the instructed gaming state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-84)
In step S109-4-84, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the selected instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the selected instruction state type in the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-84 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-91)
In step S109-4-91, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game sixteenth lottery table (see FIG. 35B). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game sixteenth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process in the subsequent stage. Then, when the process of step S109-4-91 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92.

(Step S109-4-92)
In step S109-4-92, the main CPU 301 conducts a fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of lottering the addition number of the remaining counter. When the process of step S109-4-92 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-101)
In step S109-4-101, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an external terminal board control flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the external signal second output bit and the external signal fourth output bit in the external terminal board control flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-101 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-102.

(Step S109-4-102)
In step S109-4-102, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the fourth instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “10” indicating the fourth instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the fourth instruction game (step S109-4-102 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-151, and the game type is not the fourth instruction game. Is determined (step S109-4-102 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-103.

(Step S109-4-103)
In step S109-4-103, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the second instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “8” indicating the second instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the second instruction game (step S109-4-103 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-104, and the game type is not the second instruction game. Is determined (step S109-4-103 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-106.

(Step S109-4-104)
In step S109-4-104, the main CPU 301 performs a second instruction game first remaining counter subtraction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-104 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-105.

(Step S109-4-105)
In step S109-4-105, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the third accessory operation management flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in a third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-105 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-106.

(Step S109-4-106)
In step S109-4-106, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the third instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “9” indicating the third instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the third instruction game (step S109-4-106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-107, and the game type is not the third instruction game. Is determined (step S109-4-106 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-109.

(Step S109-4-107)
In step S109-4-107, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game 15th lottery table (see FIG. 35A). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game 15th lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-107 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-108.

(Step S109-4-108)
In step S109-4-108, the main CPU 301 performs a fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of lottering the addition number of the remaining counter. Then, when the process of step S109-4-108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-112.

(Step S109-4-109)
In step S109-4-109, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “middle cherry” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “15” indicating “middle cherry”. . If it is determined that the “middle cherry” is won (step S109-4-109 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-110, and the “middle cherry” is not won. If it is determined (step S109-4-109 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-112.

(Step S109-4-110)
In step S109-4-110, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3”, which is the set number in the middle cherry, as the number of additions in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and sets the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second as the remaining counters to be added. Processing to set the instruction game third remaining counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-110 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-111.

(Step S109-4-111)
In step S109-4-111, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-111 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-112.

(Step S109-4-112)
In step S109-4-112, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-4-112 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-113. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109). -4-112 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-131.

(Step S109-4-113)
In step S109-4-113, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating the first instruction state type. When it is determined that the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type (step S109-4-113 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-117, and the value of the instruction state type is determined. Is determined not to be the first instruction state type (step S109-4-113 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-114.

(Step S109-4-114)
In step S109-4-114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the third accessory operation management flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-114 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-115.

(Step S109-4-115)
In step S109-4-115, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the first instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “7” indicating the first instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the first instruction game (step S109-4-115 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-116, and the game type is not the first instruction game. Is determined (step S109-4-115 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-116)
In step S109-4-116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the preparation protection flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” in a preparation protection flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-116 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-117)
In step S109-4-117, the main CPU 301 performs a third accessory operation lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains an 8-bit random number value, and performs a lottery process based on the third actor action lottery value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-117 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-118.

(Step S109-4-118)
In step S109-4-118, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is made in the lottery process. When it is determined that the lottery process is won (step S109-4-118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-119, and when it is determined that the lottery process is not won. (Step S109-4-118 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-4-120.

(Step S109-4-119)
In step S109-4-119, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the third accessory operation management flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-119 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-120.

(Step S109-4-120)
In step S109-4-120, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “2” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “2” or more. And when it determines with the value of a 2nd instruction | indication game 2nd remaining counter being "2" or more (step S109-4-120 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S109-4-121, and the 1st If it is determined that the value of the 2-instruction game second remaining counter is not equal to or greater than “2” (step S109-4-120 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-123.

(Step S109-4-121)
In step S109-4-121, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third accessory operation management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. When it is determined that the third accessory operation management flag is ON (step S109-4-121 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-123, and the third accessory operation management flag is set. If it is determined that is not on (step S109-4-121 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-122.

(Step S109-4-122)
In step S109-4-122, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the special bonus flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” in a special bonus flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-122 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-123.

(Step S109-4-123)
In step S109-4-123, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is “5” or less. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “5” or less. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is “5” or less (step S109-4-123 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-124, and the first If it is determined that the value of the 2-instruction gaming first remaining counter is not equal to or less than “5” (step S109-4-123 = No), the instruction gaming state management A processing subroutine is terminated and the winning information setting process is completed. The process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-4-124)
In step S109-4-124, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “1” (step S109-4-124 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-125, and the second If it is determined that the value of the instruction game second remaining counter is not “1” (step S109-4-124 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-127.

(Step S109-4-125)
In step S109-4-125, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “1” as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and sets the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be added. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-125 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-126.

(Step S109-4-126)
In step S109-4-126, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-126 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-127.

(Step S109-4-127)
In step S109-4-127, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to a second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-127 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-131)
In step S109-4-131, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the third instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “9” indicating the third instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the third instruction game (step S109-4-131 = Yes), the instruction game state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the winning information setting process step S109-5 is performed. If it is determined that the game type is not the third instruction game (step S109-4-131 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-132.

(Step S109-4-132)
In step S109-4-132, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “1” (step S109-4-132 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-133, and the second When it is determined that the value of the instruction game second remaining counter is not “1” (step S109-4-132 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-136.

(Step S109-4-133)
In step S109-4-133, the main CPU 301 performs reference area selection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to an instruction game seventh lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 and performs a common lottery process to be described later on the basis of the value of the instruction game management type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for selecting a reference area (lottery range) of a table to be used is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-133 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-134.

(Step S109-4-134)
In step S109-4-134, the main CPU 301 performs a common lottery process to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set reference area of the lottery table and performs a lottery process based on the value of the second winning area information. Then, when the process of step S109-4-134 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-135.

(Step S109-4-135)
In step S109-4-135, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not winning is performed in the common lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). If it is determined that the common lottery process is won (step S109-4-135 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-138, and it is determined that the common lottery process is not won. In this case (step S109-4-135 = No), the instructed gaming state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-136)
In step S109-4-136, the main CPU 301 performs a second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for lottery of the remaining counter addition. Then, when the process of step S109-4-136 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-137.

(Step S109-4-137)
In step S109-4-137, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not winning is made in the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). Process. And when it determines with having won in the 2nd instruction | indication game 2nd remaining counter special lottery process (step S109-4-137 = Yes), a process transfers to step S109-4-138, and a 2nd instruction | indication game is carried out. When it is determined that the second remaining counter special lottery process is not won (step S109-4-137 = No), the instructed gaming state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the winning information setting process step S109- The processing is shifted to 5.

(Step S109-4-138)
In step S109-4-138, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “1” as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and sets the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be added. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-138 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-139.

(Step S109-4-139)
In step S109-4-139, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. When the process of step S109-4-139 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Step S109-4-151)
In step S109-4-151, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter is “0” (step S109-4-151 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-152, and the fourth If it is determined that the value of the instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S109-4-151 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-171.

(Step S109-4-152)
In step S109-4-152, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fifth instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the fifth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fifth instruction game first remaining counter is “0” (step S109-4-152 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-171. When it is determined that the value of the instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S109-4-152 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-153.

(Step S109-4-153)
In step S109-4-153, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the effect management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an effect management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. If it is determined that the production management flag is on (step S109-4-153 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-154, and it is determined that the production management flag is not on. In this case (step S109-4-153 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-157.

(Steps S109-4-154)
In step S109-4-154, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a fourth wait timer for performance. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the fourth wait timer for presentation in the register as the waiting time. Then, when the process of step S109-4-154 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-155.

(Step S109-4-155)
In step S109-4-155, the main CPU 301 performs timer waiting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 waits for a transition to the next process until a waiting time corresponding to the value of the fourth wait timer for presentation set in the register as the waiting time elapses. Then, when the process of step S109-4-155 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-156.

(Step S109-4-156)
In step S109-4-156, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the effect management flag to OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in an effect management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-156 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-157.

(Step S109-4-157)
In step S109-4-157, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the fifth instruction game first remaining counter and the fifth instruction game second remaining counter as the remaining counters to be subtracted in the subsequent sub data subtraction confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-157 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-158.

(Step S109-4-158)
In step S109-4-158, the main CPU 301 performs sub data subtraction confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a subtraction process for the set remaining counter, a check process for the updated value after the subtraction, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-158 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-159.

(Step S109-4-159)
In step S109-4-159, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “lost”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating “losing”. If it is determined that it is “losing” (step S109-4-159 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-180, and if it is determined that it is not “losing” ( Step S109-4-159 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-160.

(Step S109-4-160)
In step S109-4-160, the main CPU 301 performs processing for selecting a reference area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets an instruction game twelfth lottery table as a table to be referred to by the subsequent range lottery process, and performs a process of determining a reference range based on the second winning area information. Then, when the process of step S109-4-160 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-161.

(Step S109-4-161)
In step S109-4-161, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-161 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-162.

(Step S109-4-162)
In step S109-4-162, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of times of lottery in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-162 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-163.

(Step S109-4-163)
In step S109-4-163, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the lottery range of the set table, performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the obtained random number value, and performs processing for obtaining a winning value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-163 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-164.

(Step S109-4-164)
In step S109-4-164, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the added value won in the above range lottery process as the number of additions in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction as the remaining counters to be added. A process of setting the game third remaining counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-164 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-165.

(Step S109-4-165)
In step S109-4-165, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-165 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-180.

(Step S109-4-171)
In step S109-4-171, the main CPU 301 performs a subtraction process for the fourth instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-171 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-172.

(Step S109-4-172)
In step S109-4-172, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the effect management flag to ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to an effect management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-172 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-173.

(Step S109-4-173)
In step S109-4-173, the main CPU 301 performs reference area selection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to an instruction game 14th lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, and uses a set value provided in the main RAM 303 to determine a table used in a common lottery process to be described later. Processing to select a reference area (lottery range) is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-173 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-174.

(Steps S109-4-174)
In step S109-4-174, the main CPU 301 performs a common lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set reference area of the lottery table and performs a lottery process based on the value of the second winning area information. Then, when the process of step S109-4-174 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-175.

(Step S109-4-175)
In step S109-4-175, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not winning is performed in the common lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). If it is determined that the common lottery process has been won (step S109-4-175 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-176, and it is determined that the common lottery process has not been won. In the case (step S109-4-175 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-177.

(Step S109-4-176)
In step S109-4-176, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the fourth instruction game management flag to ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a fourth instruction game management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-176 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-177.

(Step S109-4-177)
In step S109-4-177, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fourth instruction game management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the fourth instruction game management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the fourth instruction game management flag is on (step S109-4-177 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-178, and the fourth instruction game management flag is on. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S109-4-177 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-180.

(Step S109-4-178)
In step S109-4-178, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game 17th lottery table (see FIG. 35C). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game 17th lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-178 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-179.

(Step S109-4-179)
In step S109-4-179, the main CPU 301 performs a fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of lottering the addition number of the remaining counter. Then, when the process of step S109-4-179 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-180.

(Step S109-4-180)
In step S109-4-180, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is other than “0”. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-4-180 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-181. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109). -4-180 = No), the instruction game state management A process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Steps S109-4-181)
In step S109-4-181, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the third accessory operation management flag to ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-181 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management A process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-5 of the winning information setting process.

(Bonus internal processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the bonus internal / intermediate process performed by the process of step S109-4-21 in FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus internal intermediate processing.

(Step S109-4-21-1)
In step S109-4-21-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect state second counter is equal to or greater than the pressing order non-display determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the presentation state second counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than the push order non-display determination number “4”. And when it determines with the value of the production state 2nd counter being more than a pressing order non-display determination number (step S109-4-21-1 = Yes), a process is processed to step S109-4-21-6. If it is determined that the value of the production state second counter is not equal to or greater than the push order non-display determination number (step S109-4-21-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2. To migrate.

(Step S109-4-21-2)
In step S109-4-21-2, the main CPU 301 performs a second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for lottery of the remaining counter addition. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-3.

(Step S109-4-21-3)
In step S109-4-21-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not winning is made in the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process, that is, whether or not “1” is set in the winning flag (carry flag). Process. And when it determines with having won in the 2nd instruction | indication game 2nd remaining counter special lottery process (step S109-4-21-3 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S109-4-21-4, When it is determined that the winning is not performed in the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process (step S109-4-21-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-6.

(Step S109-4-21-4)
In step S109-4-21-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number and the target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “1” as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process, and sets the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be added. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5.

(Step S109-4-21-5)
In step S109-4-21-5, the main CPU 301 performs addition upper limit confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-6.

(Step S109-4-21-6)
In step S109-4-21-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect state second counter exceeds the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect state second counter provided in the main RAM 303 exceeds the bonus type notification determination number “7”. If it is determined that the value of the performance state second counter exceeds the bonus type notification determination number (step S109-4-21-6 = Yes), the bonus internal intermediate processing subroutine is terminated, If it is determined that the value of the state second counter does not exceed the bonus type notification determination number (step S109-4-21-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-7.

(Step S109-4-21-7)
In step S109-4-21-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the value of the effect state second counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the performance state second counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S109-4-21-7 is completed, the bonus internal intermediate processing subroutine is terminated.

(Second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process)
Next, the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process performed by the process of step S109-4-21-2 of FIG. 56 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery processing.

(Step S109-4-21-2-1)
In step S109-4-21-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game fourth lottery table (see FIG. 27A). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game fourth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent common lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2)
In step S109-4-21-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a common lottery process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set lottery table and performs a lottery process based on the value of the second winning area information. When the process of step S109-4-21-2-2 ends, the subroutine of the second instruction game second remaining counter special lottery process ends.

(Common lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the common lottery process performed by the process of step S109-4-21-2-2 in FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 58 shows a subroutine of the common lottery process.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-1)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a lottery value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the set lottery table and performs a process of acquiring a lottery value based on the value of the second winning area information. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-2-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery value is “255”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the acquired lottery value is “255”. If it is determined that the acquired lottery value is “255” (step S109-4-21-2-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2-7. , And when it is determined that the acquired lottery value is not “255” (step S109-4-21-2-2-2 = No), step S109-4-21-2-2-2-3 The process is transferred to.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2-3)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an 8-bit random value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-2-2-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2-4.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2-4)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for subtracting the lottery value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for subtracting the acquired lottery value from the acquired random value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-2-2-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2-5.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2-5)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the subtraction result is negative. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random number value is a negative value. If it is determined that the subtraction result is negative (step S109-4-21-2-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2-7. If it is determined that the subtraction result is not negative (step S109-4-21-2-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-2-2-2-6.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2-6)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “0” meaning loss to a carry flag used as a winning flag. When the process of step S109-4-21-2-2-2-6 is completed, the common lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Step S109-4-21-2-2-2-7)
In step S109-4-21-2-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” in the winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “1” meaning winning in a carry flag used as a winning flag. When the process of step S109-4-21-2-2-7 is completed, the common lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Additional upper limit confirmation process)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the addition upper limit confirmation process performed by the process of step S109-4-21-5 in FIG. 56 and the like will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of addition upper limit confirmation processing.

(Step S109-4-21-5-1)
In step S109-4-21-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the addition number to the value of the first addition target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the value set as the addition number to the value of the first addition target remaining counter set in the main RAM 303 and set as the addition target counter. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-2.

(Step S109-4-21-5-2)
In step S109-4-21-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the updated value after the addition is larger than “255”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an update value obtained by adding the addition number to the value of the first addition target remaining counter by the above addition process is a value greater than “255”. If it is determined that the updated value after addition is greater than “255” (step S109-4-21-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-3. If it is determined that the updated value after addition is not greater than “255” (step S109-4-21-5-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-4. To do.

(Step S109-4-21-5-3)
In step S109-4-21-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “255” as the update value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “255” in a register that stores the update value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-4.

(Step S109-4-21-5-4)
In step S109-4-21-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an update value in the first addition target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the register in which the updated value is stored in the first addition target remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-5-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-5.

(Step S109-4-21-5-5)
In step S109-4-21-5-5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the update value is smaller than “128”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the register storing the update value is smaller than “128”. When it is determined that the update value is smaller than “128” (step S109-4-21-5-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-7, and the update value Is determined not to be smaller than “128” (step S109-4-21-5-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-6.

(Step S109-4-21-5-6)
In step S109-4-21-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “127” as the update value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “127” in the register in which the update value is stored. Then, when the process of step S109-4-21-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-21-5-7.

(Step S109-4-21-5-7)
In step S109-4-21-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an update value in the second addition target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the register in which the updated value is stored in the second addition target remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-21-5-7 is completed, the subroutine for the addition upper limit confirmation process is terminated.

(Instruction game initial setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the instruction game initial setting process performed by the process of step S109-4-25 in FIG. 50 and the like will be described. FIG. 60 shows a subroutine of the instruction game initial setting process.

(Step S109-4-25-1)
In step S109-4-25-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game eighth lottery table (see FIG. 30A). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game eighth lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table to be referred to in the subsequent instruction state type lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2.

(Step S109-4-25-2)
In step S109-4-25-2, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction state type lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 refers to the set lottery table and performs a lottery process for the instruction state type. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-3.

(Step S109-4-25-3)
In step S109-4-25-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the winning type won in the indicated state type lottery in the indicated state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-4.

(Step S109-4-25-4)
In step S109-4-25-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “40” in the second instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second instruction game prescribed number “40”, which is an initial setting number, in a second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-5.

(Step S109-4-25-5)
In step S109-4-25-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the game type is the first instruction game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “7” indicating the first instruction game. If it is determined that the game type is the first instruction game (step S109-4-25-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-9, and the game type is first. If it is determined that the game is not an instruction game (step S109-4-25-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-6.

(Step S109-4-25-6)
In step S109-4-25-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the instruction game flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an instruction game flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. If it is determined that the instruction game flag is on (step S109-4-25-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8, and the instruction game flag is not on. (Step S109-4-25-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7.

(Step S109-4-25-7)
In step S109-4-25-7, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction state variable lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for the instruction state variable (mode). Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8.

(Step S109-4-25-8)
In step S109-4-25-8, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game management type lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for the designated game management type. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-9.

(Step S109-4-25-9)
In step S109-4-25-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the instruction game flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting on an instruction game flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10.

(Step S109-4-25-10)
In step S109-4-25-10, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game type determination process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing at the time of instruction game type transition. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game initial setting process ends.

(Instruction game type lottery process)
Next, the instruction game type lottery process performed by the process of step S109-4-25-2 in FIG. 60 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 61 is a view showing a subroutine of the designated game type lottery process.

(Step S109-4-25-2-1)
In step S109-4-25-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value based on the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to a table set before the instruction game type lottery process is called, and performs a process of obtaining the first lottery value corresponding to the set value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-2.

(Step S109-4-25-2-2)
In step S109-4-25-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a 16-bit random value as a random value used for the following lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-3.

(Step S109-4-25-2-3)
In step S109-4-25-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” as the number of times of lottery by the following lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-4.

(Step S109-4-25-2-4)
In step S109-4-25-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for substituting a value obtained by subtracting the lottery value from the random value into the random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the acquired lottery value from the value of the register storing the random number value and rewriting the value of the register storing the random value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-5.

(Step S109-4-25-2-5)
In step S109-4-25-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the random value is less than “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the random number value is less than “0” by the process of step S109-4-25-2-4. If it is determined that the random number value is less than “0” (step S109-4-25-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-9, where If it is determined that the numerical value is not less than “0” (step S109-4-25-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-6.

(Step S109-4-25-2-6)
In step S109-4-25-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next lottery value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value in the next reference column of the corresponding table. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-7.

(Step S109-4-25-2-7)
In step S109-4-25-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the register in which the number of lotteries is stored. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-8.

(Step S109-4-25-2-8)
In step S109-4-25-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the register storing the number of lotteries has become “0” by the process of step S109-4-25-2-7. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S109-4-25-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-9, and the number of lotteries is determined. Is determined not to be “0” (step S109-4-25-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-4.

(Step S109-4-25-2-9)
In step S109-4-25-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the register in which the number of lotteries is stored is “1”, that is, whether or not the second instruction state type has been won. When it is determined that the number of lotteries is “1” (step S109-4-25-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-2-10, and the number of lotteries is determined. Is determined not to be “1” (step S109-4-25-2-9 = No), the instruction state type lottery processing subroutine is terminated.

(Step S109-4-25-2-10)
In step S109-4-25-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” in the fourth instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a fourth instruction game prescribed number “10”, which is an initially set number, in a fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-25-2-10 is completed, the instruction state type lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Instruction state variable lottery process)
Next, an instruction state variable lottery process performed by the process of step S109-4-25-7 in FIG. 60 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction state variable lottery process.

(Step S109-4-25-7-1)
In step S109-4-25-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” in the instruction state variable register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “4” indicating the mode E in the instruction state variable register in order to temporarily set the instruction state variable. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-2.

(Step S109-4-25-7-2)
In step S109-4-25-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a premium replay has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the premium replay has been won (step S109-4-25-7-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-11 to win the premium replay. If it is determined that it is not (step S109-4-25-7-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-3.

(Step S109-4-25-7-3)
In step S109-4-25-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction state flag is the third instruction state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction state flag provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating the third instruction state. When it is determined that the value of the instruction state flag is the third instruction state (step S109-4-25-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-4. If it is determined that the value of the instruction state flag is not the third instruction state (step S109-4-25-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-6. To do.

(Step S109-4-25-7-4)
In step S109-4-25-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating the first instruction state type. If it is determined that the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type (step S109-4-25-7-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-5. If it is determined that the value of the instruction state type is not the first instruction state type (step S109-4-25-7-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-11. To migrate.

(Step S109-4-25-7-5)
In step S109-4-25-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” in the fourth instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a fourth instruction game prescribed number “10”, which is an initially set number, in a fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-11.

(Step S109-4-25-7-6)
In step S109-4-25-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery range. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets an instruction game eleventh lottery table as a table to be referred to by the subsequent range lottery process, and performs a process of determining the reference range based on the set value. When the process of step S109-4-25-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-7.

(Step S109-4-25-7-7)
In step S109-4-25-7-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-8.

(Step S109-4-25-7-8)
In step S109-4-25-7-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” as the number of times of lottery by the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-9.

(Step S109-4-25-7-9)
In step S109-4-25-7-9, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the lottery range of the set table, performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the obtained random number value, and performs processing for obtaining a winning value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-10.

(Step S109-4-25-7-10)
In step S109-4-25-7-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the selected mode in the register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of rewriting the value of the instruction state variable register to the value acquired in the range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-7-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-7-11.

(Step S109-4-25-7-11)
In step S109-4-25-7-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction state variable. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value stored in the instruction state variable register in an instruction state variable storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-25-7-11 is completed, the instruction state variable lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Instruction game management type lottery process)
Next, the instruction game management type lottery process performed by the process of step S109-4-25-8 in FIG. 60 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game management type lottery process.

(Step S109-4-25-8-1)
In step S109-4-25-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery range. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets an instruction game sixth lottery table as a table to be referred to by a subsequent range lottery process, and performs a process of determining a reference range by an instruction state variable (mode). Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8-2.

(Step S109-4-25-8-2)
In step S109-4-25-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8-3.

(Step S109-4-25-8-3)
In step S109-4-25-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of times of lottery in the subsequent range lottery process. When the process of step S109-4-25-8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8-4.

(Step S109-4-25-8-4)
In step S109-4-25-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the lottery range of the set table, performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the obtained random number value, and performs processing for obtaining a winning value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-8-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-8-5.

(Step S109-4-25-8-5)
In step S109-4-25-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game management type (mode). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game management type (mode) won in the range lottery process in the designated game management type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-25-8-5 is completed, the instruction game management type lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Instruction game type determination process)
Next, based on FIG. 64, the instruction game type determination process performed by the process of step S109-4-25-10 of FIG. 60 and the like will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction game type determination processing.

(Step S109-4-25-10-1)
In step S109-4-25-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the effect state third counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the effect state third counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-2.

(Step S109-4-25-10-2)
In step S109-4-25-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value indicating the first instruction state type (normally “0”). If it is determined that the value of the instruction state type is the first instruction state type (step S109-4-25-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-3. If it is determined that the value of the instruction state type is not the first instruction state type (step S109-4-25-10-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-5. To migrate.

(Step S109-4-25-10-3)
In step S109-4-25-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. And when it determines with the value of a 4th instruction | indication game 1st remaining counter being "0" (step S109-4-25-10-3 = Yes), step S109-4-25-10-5 If it is determined that the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S109-4-25-10-3 = No), step S109-4-25 is performed. The process is shifted to -10-4.

(Step S109-4-25-10-4)
In step S109-4-25-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” indicating the second instruction state type in the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-5.

(Step S109-4-25-10-5)
In step S109-4-25-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game type transition setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the next game type and the like based on the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, when the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” (first instruction state type), the main CPU 301 stores the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, a value “8” indicating the second instruction game is set. Further, when the value of the instruction state type storage area is “1” (second instruction state type), the main CPU 301 sets a value “10” indicating the fourth instruction game in the next game type storage area, A fourth instruction game management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is set to ON. Further, when the value of the instruction state type storage area is “2” (third instruction state type), the main CPU 301 sets a value “9” indicating the third instruction game in the next game type storage area. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-6.

(Step S109-4-25-10-6)
In step S109-4-25-10-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. And when it determines with the value of a 2nd instruction | indication game 1st remaining counter being "0" (step S109-4-25-10-6 = Yes), step S109-4-25-10-7 If the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is determined not to be “0” (step S109-4-25-10-6 = No), the instruction game type determination process is performed. Exit the subroutine.

(Step S109-4-25-10-7)
In step S109-4-25-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “40” in the second instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second instruction game prescribed number “40”, which is an initial setting number, in a second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-25-10-8.

(Step S109-4-25-10-8)
In step S109-4-25-10-8, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described instruction game management type lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for the designated game management type. Then, when the process of step S109-4-25-10-8 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game type determination process ends.

(Fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the 5th instruction | indication game 1st remaining counter lottery process performed by the process of FIG.52 S109-4-92 etc. is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery processing.

(Step S109-4-92-1)
In step S109-4-92-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “losing”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating “losing”. If it is determined that the game is “losing” (step S109-4-92-1 = Yes), the fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and it is determined that it is not “losing”. If it is determined (step S109-4-92-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-2.

(Step S109-4-92-2)
In step S109-4-92-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery range. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for selecting the lottery range to be referred to by the subsequent range lottery processing based on the second winning area information for the set table. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-3.

(Step S109-4-92-3)
In step S109-4-92-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a random number value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an 8-bit random value as a random value used in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-4.

(Step S109-4-92-4)
In step S109-4-92-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the number of times of lottery in the subsequent range lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-5.

(Step S109-4-92-5)
In step S109-4-92-5, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 refers to the lottery range of the set table, performs lottery for the number of lotteries using the obtained random number value, and performs processing for obtaining a winning value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-6.

(Step S109-4-92-6)
In step S109-4-92-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for converting the selected designated value into an added number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the addition number based on the designated value won in the range lottery process based on the designated value conversion table (see FIG. 35D) provided in the main ROM 302. Do. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-7.

(Step S109-4-92-7)
In step S109-4-92-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the added number converted from the specified number is “0”. If it is determined that the addition number is “0” (step S109-4-92-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-9, and the addition number is “0”. If it is determined that it is not (Step S109-4-92-7 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-4-92-8.

(Step S109-4-92-8)
In step S109-4-92-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the general-purpose state management flag to ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to a general-purpose state management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-9.

(Step S109-4-92-9)
In step S109-4-92-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the fifth instruction game first remaining counter and the fifth instruction game second remaining counter as addition target remaining counters in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S109-4-92-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-92-10.

(Step S109-4-92-10)
In step S109-4-92-10, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described addition upper limit confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. When the process of step S109-4-92-10 is completed, the fifth instruction game first remaining counter lottery process subroutine is terminated.

(Sub data subtraction confirmation process)
Next, based on FIG. 66, the sub data subtraction confirmation processing performed by the processing in step S109-4-158 in FIG. 55 and the like will be described. FIG. 66 shows a subroutine for sub data subtraction confirmation processing.

(Step S109-4-158-1)
In step S109-4-158-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the value of the first subtraction target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first subtraction target remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 and set as the subtraction target counter. Then, when the process of step S109-4-158-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-158-2.

(Step S109-4-158-2)
In step S109-4-158-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value subtracted from the update value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the result subtracted in the subtraction process in a register that stores the update value. Then, when the process of step S109-4-158-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-158-3.

(Step S109-4-158-3)
In step S109-4-158-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the update value is smaller than “128”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the register storing the update value is smaller than “128”. If it is determined that the update value is smaller than “128” (step S109-4-158-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-158-5, and the update value is “128”. If it is determined that it is not smaller (step S109-4-158-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4-158-4.

(Step S109-4-158-4)
In step S109-4-158-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “127” as the update value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “127” in the register in which the update value is stored. Then, when the process of step S109-4-158-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-158-5.

(Step S109-4-158-5)
In step S109-4-158-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an update value in the second subtraction target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the register in which the updated value is stored in the second subtraction target remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of steps S109-4-158-5 is completed, the sub data subtraction confirmation processing subroutine is terminated.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 67, the display determination process performed by the process of step S114 of FIG. 41 is demonstrated. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S114-1)
In step S114-1, the main CPU 301 performs display determination command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a display determination command having display determination start information and the like to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S114-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-2.

(Step S114-2)
In step S <b> 114-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the active line is a combination of symbols related to “replay”. If it is determined that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed (Step S114-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S114-3, and the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed. If it is determined that it is not (step S114-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S114-5.

(Step S114-3)
In step S <b> 114-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game in-operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting ON in the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-4.

(Step S114-4)
In step S114-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the number of payouts. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the register used for storing the value of the payout number to “0”. As described in the process of step S115 of the main loop process, the value of this register is stored as the value of the number of payouts in the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S114-4 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S115 of the main loop process.

(Step S114-5)
In step S114-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing the calculated payout number value in the register (register used for storing the payout number value). When the process of step S114-5 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S115 of the main loop process.

(Payment processing)
Next, the payout process performed by the process of step S116 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 68 shows a subroutine for payout processing.

(Step S116-1)
In step S116-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the payout display buffer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing “0” in the payout display buffer provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-2.

(Step S116-2)
In step S116-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter is not “0”. That is, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is not “0”. If it is determined that the value of the payout number counter is not “0” (step S116-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-3, and the value of the payout number counter is “0”. If it is determined (step S116-2 = No), the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-3)
In step S116-3, the main CPU 301 performs a payout start command transmission process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a payout start command having information for starting to pay out medals to the sub-control board 400. The payout start command is also added with information of the remaining payout number counter, and a process of transmitting to the sub-control board 400 is performed. Then, when the process of step S116-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-4.

(Step S116-4)
In step S116-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is less than “50”. That is, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stored number has reached the limit value (50 sheets) of the stored number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “less than 50”. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “less than 50” (step S116-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-5, and the value of the stored number counter is “less than 50”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S116-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-9.

(Step S116-5)
In step S116-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a storage addition waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining a storage addition waiting time preset in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S116-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-6.

(Step S116-6)
In step S116-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the storage addition waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the acquired storage addition waiting time as a timer counter value and determining whether or not the timer counter value has become “0”. When it is determined that the storage addition waiting time has elapsed (step S116-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-7, and when it is determined that the storage addition waiting time has not elapsed. (Step S116-6 = No), the process of Step S116-6 is repeatedly executed until the storage addition waiting time elapses.

(Step S116-7)
In step S116-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-8.

(Step S116-8)
In step S116-8, the main CPU 301 performs transmission processing of a stored number display command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a stored number display command having information on the stored number to the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S116-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-10.

(Step S116-9)
In step S116-9, the main CPU 301 performs a medal “one” payout process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing such as outputting a signal for paying out “one” medal to the hopper 202. Note that the main CPU 301 performs a process of displaying an error when a normal operation signal cannot be received within a predetermined control time in the medal “one” payout process. Then, when the process of step S116-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-10.

(Step S116-10)
In step S116-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the payout display buffer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the payout display buffer (acquired number counter) provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-11.

(Step S116-11)
In step S116-11, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number display command transmission process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a payout number display command including information on the number of acquired medals to the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S116-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-12.

(Step S116-12)
In step S116-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-13.

(Step S116-13)
In step S116-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the payout of medals has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the payout number counter is “0” (step S116-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-14, and the value of the payout number counter is not “0”. Is determined (step S116-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-4.

(Step S116-14)
In step S116-14, the main CPU 301 performs a payout end command transmission process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a payout end command having information indicating that the payout of medals has ended to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S116-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-15.

(Step S116-15)
In step S116-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB is operating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the BB is operating (step S116-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16, and if it is determined that the BB is not operating (step S116-15). = No), the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-16)
In step S116-16, the main CPU 301 performs a BB acquisition number update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the value (payout number) of the payout display buffer provided in the main RAM 303 to the BB acquisition number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-16 ends, the payout process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S117 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 41 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-1)
In step S <b> 117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed on the active line (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and the “combination of symbols related to bonus” "Is not displayed on the active line (step S117-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs bonus display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing at the time of bonus display. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a BB operation end confirmation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB state end condition is satisfied. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB operation is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the carry flag set in the BB operation end confirmation process is “0” indicating the end of the BB operation. When it is determined that the BB operation is finished (step S117-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-5, and when it is determined that the BB operation is not finished (including during normal operation). (Step S117-4 = No), the process proceeds to Step S117-7.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port sixth data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing “first bit” and “second bit” of the sixth output port data provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-6.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs bonus end time setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “0” indicating that a general game is in progress in the first game state and the second game state, and clearing the value of the external terminal board control flag. Then, when the process of step S117-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9.

(Step S117-7)
In step S117-7, the main CPU 301 performs an accessory operating process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a winning determination process at the time of RB operation. Then, when the process of step S117-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-8.

(Step S117-8)
In step S117-8, the main CPU 301 performs RT state transition processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a determination process at the time of transition to RT. Then, when the process of step S117-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9.

(Step S117-9)
In step S117-9, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction gaming state management B process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs various setting processes for each game type. Then, when the process of step S117-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-10.

(Step S117-10)
In step S117-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second subcommand transmission table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second subcommand transmission table provided in the main ROM 302 as a table used in the subsequent subcommand batch transmission processing. Then, when the process of step S117-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-11.

(Step S117-11)
In step S117-11, the main CPU 301 performs the subcommand batch transmission process described above. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command specified in the set table. Then, when the process of step S117-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-12.

(Step S117-12)
In step S117-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the next game type storage area in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-13.

(Step S117-13)
In step S117-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the output port second data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the external terminal board control flag in the output port second data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-14.

(Step S117-14)
In step S117-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “premium replay” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “3” indicating “premium replay”. . If it is determined that “Premium Replay” has been won (Step S117-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S117-15, and it is determined that “Premium Replay” has not been won. (Step S117-14 = No), the process proceeds to Step S117-17.

(Step S117-15)
In step S117-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a third wait timer for performance. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the third wait timer for performance in the register as the waiting time. Then, when the process of step S117-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-17.

(Step S117-17)
In step S117-17, the main CPU 301 performs a timer loop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 waits for a transition to the next process until a waiting time corresponding to the value of the third wait timer for performance set in the register as the waiting time elapses. Then, when the process of step S117-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-18.

(Step S117-18)
In step S117-18, the main CPU 301 performs a BB operation end confirmation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB state end condition is satisfied. Then, when the process of step S117-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-19.

(Step S117-19)
In step S117-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB operation is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the carry flag set in the BB operation end confirmation process is “0” indicating the end of the BB operation. When it is determined that the BB operation is finished (step S117-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-20, and when it is determined that the BB operation is not finished (including during normal operation). (Step S117-19 = No) ends the subroutine of the game state transition process, and proceeds to Step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-20)
In step S117-20, the main CPU 301 performs RWM initialization processing at the end of BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 303 such as a value of the BB operation state and a value of the BB acquisition number counter. When the process of step S117-20 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Bonus display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 70, the bonus display time process performed by the process of step S117-2 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 70 shows a subroutine for bonus display processing.

(Step S117-2-1)
In step S117-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a bonus type in a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in a register. Then, when the process of step S117-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-2.

(Step S117-2-2)
In step S117-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the bonus type storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-3.

(Step S117-2-3)
In step S117-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RB is aligned. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the acquired bonus type value is a value “4” indicating “RB”. If it is determined that the RB is aligned (step S117-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-5, and if it is determined that the RB is not aligned (step S117). -2-3 = No), and the process proceeds to step S117-2-4.

(Step S117-2-4)
In step S117-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the bonus type in the BB operating state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the bonus type stored in the register in the BB operation state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-5.

(Step S117-2-5)
In step S117-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display time setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a corresponding bonus display time setting process according to the value of the bonus type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, when the bonus type is “BB1”, “BB2”, “BB3”, the value “4” indicating that the BB general game is being played in the first game state and the second game state, and RT2 in the current RT state. The indicated value “2” is set, the values of the general-purpose state management flag and the presentation state second counter are cleared, and processing for setting the external signal first output bit and the third output bit in the external terminal board control flag is performed. When the bonus type is “RB”, the value “6” indicating RB during BB is set in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the value “0” indicating RT0 is set in the current RT state, and RB The process of setting the value “4” of the number of actuations and the number of RB winnings is performed. Then, when step S117-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117-2-6.

(Step S117-2-6)
In step S117-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RB is operating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “6” indicating RB in BB. If it is determined that the RB is in operation (step S117-2-6 = Yes), the bonus display process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-9 of the game state transition process. If it is determined that the RB is not operating (step S117-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-7.

(Step S117-2-7)
In step S117-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily setting the first accessory operation as the next game type. Specifically, in order to set the next game type, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily setting a value “4” indicating “first actuating action” in the register for the next game type. Then, when the process of step S117-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-8.

(Step S117-2-8)
In step S117-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “first normal”, “second normal”, or “first internal”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or less than the value “2” indicating “first internal”. If it is determined that the game type is any one of “first normal”, “second normal”, or “first internal” (step S117-2-8 = Yes), step S117 is performed. -2-12, and when it is determined that the game type is not any of “first normal”, “second normal”, and “first internal” (step S117-2- 8 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-9.

(Step S117-2-9)
In step S117-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily setting the second accessory operation as the next game type. Specifically, in order to set the next game type, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily resetting the value of the register for the next game type to a value “5” indicating “second character operation”. Then, when the process of step S117-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-10.

(Step S117-2-10)
In step S117-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third accessory operation management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a third accessory operation management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. When it is determined that the third accessory operation management flag is on (step S117-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-11, and the third accessory operation management flag is set. If it is determined that is not on (step S117-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-12.

(Step S117-2-11)
In step S117-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily setting the third accessory operation as the next game type. Specifically, in order to set the next game type, the main CPU 301 performs a process of temporarily resetting the value of the register for the next game type to a value “6” indicating “third actor operation”. Then, when the process of step S117-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-12.

(Step S117-2-12)
In step S117-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of permanently setting the value of the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the register for the next game type temporarily set in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-13.

(Step S117-2-13)
In step S117-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the instruction state type is “third instruction state type”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating “third instruction state type”. When it is determined that the instruction state type is “third instruction state type” (step S117-2-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-14, and the instruction state type is “ If it is determined that it is not the “third instruction state type” (step S117-2-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-17.

(Step S117-2-14)
In step S117-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the preparation protection flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a preparation protection flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. If it is determined that the preparation protection flag is on (step S117-2-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-17, and it is determined that the preparation protection flag is not on. If (step S117-2-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-15.

(Step S117-2-15)
In step S117-2-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “first instruction state type” as the instruction state type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” indicating the value of the “first instruction state type” in the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-16.

(Step S117-2-16)
In step S117-2-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to a second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-17.

(Step S117-2-17)
In step S117-2-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the preparation protection flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in a preparation protection flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-2-17 is completed, the bonus display time process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-9 of the game state transition process.

(BB operation completion confirmation process)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the BB operation completion confirmation process performed by the process of step S117-3 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the BB operation end confirmation process.

(Step S117-3-1)
In step S117-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a carry flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value “1” indicating that the carry flag is not at the end of the BB operation. Then, when the process of step S117-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3-2.

(Step S117-3-2)
In step S117-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB is operating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the BB operation state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the BB is operating (step S117-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-3-3, and if it is determined that the BB is not operating ( Step S117-3-2 = No), the BB operation end confirmation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S117-4 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-3-3)
In step S117-3-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the BB payout number has exceeded “53”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the BB acquisition number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is larger than “53” which is the BB end determination number. If it is determined that the BB payout number exceeds “53” (step S117-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-3-4, and the BB payout number is “53”. If it is determined that it does not exceed (step S117-3-3 = No), the BB operation end confirmation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-4 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-3-4)
In step S117-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the carry flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “0” indicating that the BB operation is ended in the carry flag. Then, when the process of step S117-3-4 ends, the subroutine of the BB operation end confirmation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S117-4 of the game state transition process.

(Processing during the operation of an accessory)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the accessory operating process performed by the process of step S117-7 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of a process during an accessory operation.

(Step S117-7-1)
In step S117-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the RB is operating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “6” indicating RB in BB. If it is determined that the RB is operating (step S117-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-7-2, and if it is determined that the RB is not operating ( In step S117-7-1 = No), the accessory operating process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-8 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-7-2)
In step S117-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “winning” has occurred. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the acquired number counter (paid-out number) provided in the main RAM 303 is a value other than “0”. If it is determined that “winning” has been made (step S117-7-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-7-3, and if it is determined that “winning” has not occurred ( The process proceeds to step S117-7-2 = No) and step S117-7-5.

(Step S117-7-3)
In step S117-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs an RB winning number (winning number counter) subtraction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-7-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7-4.

(Step S117-7-4)
In step S117-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the subtraction processing of the winning number counter in Step S117-7-3. A process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (step S117-7-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-7-7, and the value of the winning number counter is “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S117-7-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-7-5.

(Step S117-7-5)
In step S117-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs subtraction processing for the number of RB operations (gameable number counter). Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7-6.

(Step S117-7-6)
In step S117-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the possible game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the subtraction process of the possible game number counter in step S117-7-5. Processing is performed to determine whether or not the value of the number of allowed games counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the game possible number counter is “0” (step S117-7-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-7-7, and the value of the game possible number counter is set. Is determined not to be “0” (step S117-7-6 = No), the subroutine for the active-acting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-8 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-7-7)
In step S117-7-7, the main CPU 301 performs RB end time setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a value “4” indicating BB general during the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the RB operation number (gameable number counter) and the RB winning number (winning number counter). Processing to clear is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7-8.

(Step S117-7-8)
In step S117-7-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port sixth data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the “first bit” of the sixth output port data provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7-9.

(Step S117-7-9)
In step S117-7-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an accessory end waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value of an accessory end waiting time in a register as a waiting time. Then, when the process of step S117-7-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7-10.

(Step S117-7-10)
In step S117-7-10, the main CPU 301 performs timer waiting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 shifts to the next process until a waiting time corresponding to the value of the waiting time for the completion of the accessory set in the register as the waiting time has elapsed (step S117-7-10 = No). wait. Then, when the process of step S117-7-10 is completed (step S117-7-10 = YES), the subroutine for the process in which the accessory is operating is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-8 of the game state transition process. .

(RT state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the RT state transition process performed by the process of step S117-8 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT state transition processing.

(Step S117-8-1)
In step S117-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the general gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “0” indicating the general game state. And when it determines with it being in a general gaming state (step S117-8-1 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S117-8-2, and when it determines with not being in a general gaming state. (Step S117-8-1 = No), the RT state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S117-9 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-8-2)
In step S117-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an RT state transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the active line is an RT state transition symbol. That is, a process of determining whether one of the first RT gaming state transition replay, the third RT gaming state transition replay A, the third RT gaming state transition replay B, or the fourth RT gaming state transition replay is displayed. If it is determined that the RT state transition symbol is displayed (step S117-8-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-8-3, and it is determined that the RT state transition symbol is not displayed. If it is determined (step S117-8-2 = No), the RT state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-9 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-8-3)
In step S117-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is an RT transition time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RT type corresponding to the displayed symbol combination is different from the value of the previous RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that it is RT transition time (step S117-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-8-4, and if it is determined that it is not RT transition time ( Step S117-8-3 = No), the RT state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S117-9 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-8-4)
In step S117-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an RT type corresponding to the displayed symbol combination in the current RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-8-4 is completed, the RT state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-9 of the game state transition process.

(Instruction game state management B process)
Next, based on FIGS. 74 to 76, the instruction gaming state management B process performed by the process of step S117-9 of FIG. 69 will be described. 74 to 76 are diagrams showing a subroutine of instruction game state management B processing.

(Step S117-9-1)
In step S117-9-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “first normal” or “second normal”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or less than the value “1” indicating “second normal”. If it is determined that the game type is “first normal” or “second normal” (step S117-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-2, and the game type is determined. Is determined not to be “first normal” and “second normal” (step S117-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-4.

(Step S117-9-2)
In step S117-9-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the previous RT state is “fourth RT” and the current RT state is “first RT”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the value of the previous RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “4” indicating “fourth RT” and the value of the current RT state storage area is “first”. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “1” indicating “1RT” is performed. If it is determined that the previous RT state is “fourth RT” and the current RT state is “first RT” (step S117-9-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-3. If it is determined that the previous RT state is not the “fourth RT” or that the current RT state is not the “first RT” (step S117-9-2 = No), the instruction game state management B processing subroutine is executed. When finished, the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-9-3)
In step S117-9-3, the main CPU 301 performs normal state transition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “0” indicating “first normal” in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-9-3 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-4)
In step S117-9-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “in the first internal” or “in the second internal”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or less than the value “3” indicating “second internal”. When it is determined that the game type is “inside the first” or “inside the second” (step S117-9-4 = Yes), the instruction game state management B processing subroutine is terminated, When the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the game state transition process and it is determined that the game type is not “inside the first” or “inside the second” (step S117-9-4 = No). Then, the process proceeds to step S117-9-5.

(Step S117-9-5)
In step S117-9-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “first combination operation” or “second combination operation”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or less than the value “5” indicating “second accessory operation”. If it is determined that the game type is “first character operation” or “second character operation” (step S117-9-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6. However, if it is determined that the game type is not “first character operation” or “second character operation” (step S117-9-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-7. To do.

(Step S117-9-6)
In step S117-9-6, the main CPU 301 performs bonus end time processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs various setting processes at the end of the bonus. When the process of step S117-9-6 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-7)
In step S117-9-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “third action act”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “6” indicating “third actor action”. If it is determined that the game type is “third action act” (step S117-9-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-30, and the game type is “third. If it is determined that it is not “actual item operation” (step S117-9-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-8.

(Step S117-9-8)
In step S117-9-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “fourth instruction game”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “10” indicating “fourth instruction game”. When it is determined that the game type is “fourth instruction game” (step S117-9-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-21, and the game type is “fourth instruction game”. If it is determined that it is not “game” (step S117-9-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-9.

(Step S117-9-9)
In step S117-9-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the previous RT state is “second RT”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the previous RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating “second RT”. If it is determined that the previous RT state is “second RT” (step S117-9-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-10, and the previous RT state is “second RT”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S117-9-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-12.

(Step S117-9-10)
In step S117-9-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the current RT state is “third RT”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the current RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “3” indicating “third RT”. If it is determined that the current RT state is “third RT” (step S117-9-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-11, and the current RT state is “third RT”. If it is determined that it is not (step S117-9-10 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-11)
In step S117-9-11, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game start time determination process to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game start determination process and the like. When the process of step S117-9-11 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-12)
In step S117-9-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to shift to the second instruction game end process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has a value “0” indicating the “third gaming state” in the first gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the second instruction gaming first remaining counter. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the second instruction game end process is being shifted (step S117-9-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-13, and the second instruction game end process is shifted to. If it is determined that it is not (step S117-9-12 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-13)
In step S117-9-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the external terminal board control flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to an external terminal board control flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-14.

(Step S117-9-14)
In step S117-9-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be subtracted in the sub data subtraction confirmation process in the subsequent stage. Then, when the process of step S117-9-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-15.

(Step S117-9-15)
In step S117-9-15, the main CPU 301 performs the sub data subtraction confirmation process described above. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a subtraction process for the set remaining counter, a check process for the updated value after the subtraction, and the like. Then, when the process of step S117-9-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-16.

(Step S117-9-16)
In step S117-9-16, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” as a result of the subtraction process. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game second remaining counter is “0” (step S117-9-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-17, and the second When it is determined that the value of the instruction game second remaining counter is not “0” (step S117-9-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-20.

(Step S117-9-17)
In step S117-9-17, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game end setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a value “1” indicating “second normal” in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and sets the value of the instruction game management type storage area and the instruction game flag. Perform clearing processing. Then, when the process of step S117-9-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-18.

(Step S117-9-18)
In step S117-9-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is during the first RT operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the current RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is less than a value “2” indicating “second RT”. If it is determined that the first RT is operating (step S117-9-18 = Yes), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process. If it is determined that it is not during the first RT operation (step S117-9-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-19.

(Step S117-9-19)
In step S117-9-19, the main CPU 301 performs normal state transition processing. Specifically, a process of setting a value “0” indicating “first normal” is performed. When the process of step S117-9-19 ends, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process ends, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-20)
In step S117-9-20, the main CPU 301 performs the aforementioned instruction game initial setting process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game initial setting process and the like. When the process of step S117-9-20 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-21)
In step S117-9-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fourth instruction game process is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value of the first game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to a value “0” indicating “medium” and the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter “ A process of determining whether or not “0” exists is performed. If it is determined that the fourth instruction game process is being executed (step S117-9-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-22, not the fourth instruction game process being executed. Is determined (step S117-9-21 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-22)
In step S117-9-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fourth instruction game management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fourth instruction game management flag value provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the fourth instruction game management flag is on (step S117-9-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-25, and the fourth instruction game management flag is on. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S117-9-22 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-23.

(Step S117-9-23)
In step S117-9-23, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fifth instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fifth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fifth instruction game first remaining counter is “0” (step S117-9-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-24. When it is determined that the value of the instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S117-9-23 = No), the instruction game state management B process subroutine is terminated, and the game state transition process step The process proceeds to S117-10.

(Step S117-9-24)
In step S117-9-24, the main CPU 301 performs a fourth instruction game end setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a value “0” indicating “first instruction state type” (ART normal) in the instruction state type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and sets “0” in the next game type storage area. A value “8” indicating “second instruction game” is set, and a value “40” indicating the second instruction game time specified number is set in the second instruction game first remaining counter. When the process of step S117-9-24 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-25)
In step S117-9-25, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “10” indicating the specified number at the time of the fourth instruction game in a fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-26.

(Step S117-9-26)
In step S117-9-26, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the fourth instruction game management flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to a fourth instruction game management flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-27.

(Step S117-9-27)
In step S117-9-27, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the fifth instruction game first remaining counter and the fifth instruction game second remaining counter as addition target remaining counters in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-28.

(Step S117-9-28)
In step S117-9-28, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” as the number of additions in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-29.

(Step S117-9-29)
In step S117-9-29, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described addition upper limit confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. When the process of step S117-9-29 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S117-9-30)
In step S117-9-30, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the BB payout number has exceeded “53”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the BB acquisition number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is larger than “53” which is the BB end determination number. If it is determined that the BB payout number exceeds “53” (step S117-9-30 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-31, and the BB payout number is “53”. If it is determined that it does not exceed (step S117-9-30 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-36.

(Step S117-9-31)
In step S117-9-31, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the fourth instruction game first remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “10” indicating the specified number at the time of the fourth instruction game in a fourth instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-31 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-32.

(Step S117-9-32)
In step S117-9-32, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the general-purpose state management flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the general-purpose state management flag provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the general-purpose state management flag is on (step S117-9-32 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-36, and it is determined that the general-purpose state management flag is not on. If so (step S117-9-32 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-33.

(Step S117-9-33)
In step S117-9-33, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the fifth instruction game first remaining counter and the fifth instruction game second remaining counter as addition target remaining counters in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-33 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-34.

(Step S117-9-34)
In step S117-9-34, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5”, which is the fifth instruction game remaining counter setting number, as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-34 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-35.

(Step S117-9-35)
In step S117-9-35, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described addition upper limit confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. When the process of step S117-9-35 is completed, the instructed gaming state management B process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-9-36.

(Step S117-9-36)
In step S117-9-36, the main CPU 301 performs bonus end time processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs various setting processes at the end of the bonus. When the process of step S117-9-36 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management B process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S117-10 of the gaming state transition process.

(Bonus end processing)
Next, based on FIGS. 77 and 78, the bonus end time process performed by the process of step S117-9-6 in FIG. 74 and the like will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus end processing.

(Step S117-9-6-1)
In step S117-9-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB payout number exceeds “53”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the BB acquisition number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is larger than “53” which is the BB end determination number. If it is determined that the BB payout number exceeds “53” (step S117-9-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-2, and the BB payout number is If it is determined that the number does not exceed “53” (step S117-9-6-1 = No), the bonus end time processing subroutine is terminated.

(Step S117-9-6-2)
In step S <b> 117-9-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is “first actuating operation”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “4” indicating “first character action”. If it is determined that the game type is “first character act” (step S117-9-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-3, and the game type is determined. Is determined not to be the “first accessory operation” (step S117-9-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-13.

(Step S117-9-6-3)
In step S117-9-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the remaining counter addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the remaining counter addition number register used for setting the remaining counter addition number. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-4.

(Step S117-9-6-4)
In step S117-9-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the normal game number counter exceeds the value of the normal game maximum number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the normal game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is larger than “777” which is the maximum number of normal games (the number of ceiling games). If it is determined that the value of the normal game number counter exceeds the value of the maximum number of normal games (step S117-9-6-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-5. When it is determined that the value of the normal game number counter does not exceed the value of the maximum number of normal games (step S117-9-6-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-6. To do.

(Step S117-9-6-5)
In step S117-9-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the remaining counter addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the remaining counter addition number register. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-6.

(Step S117-9-6-6)
In step S117-9-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the performance state third counter has exceeded the prescribed bonus count count. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the performance state third counter provided in the main RAM 303 is larger than “10” which is the value of the bonus number count prescribed number. And when it determines with the value of the production state 3rd counter having exceeded the bonus count count regulation number (step S117-9-6-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S117-9-6-7. When it is determined that the value of the performance state third counter does not exceed the prescribed number of bonus counts (step S117-9-6-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-8. To do.

(Step S117-9-6-7)
In step S117-9-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the remaining counter addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the remaining counter addition number register. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-8.

(Step S117-9-6-8)
In step S117-9-6-8, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning combination counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning combination counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the winning combination counter is “0” (step S117-9-6-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-9, where the winning combination counter If it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S117-9-6-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-11.

(Step S117-9-6-9)
In step S117-9-6-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the remaining counter addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the remaining counter addition number register. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-10.

(Step S117-9-6-10)
In step S117-9-6-10, the main CPU 301 performs the aforementioned winning combination counter lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing a value to be set in the winning combination counter (number of chance replay ceilings). Then, when step S117-9-6-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-11.

(Step S117-9-6-11)
In step S117-9-6-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the second instruction game second remaining counter and the second instruction game third remaining counter as the remaining counters to be added in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-12.

(Step S117-9-6-12)
In step S117-9-6-12, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described addition upper limit confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-13.

(Step S117-9-6-13)
In step S117-9-6-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the previous RT state is “second RT”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the previous RT state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value “2” indicating “second RT”. If it is determined that the previous RT state is “second RT” (step S117-9-6-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-14, and the previous RT state is If it is determined that it is not “second RT” (step S117-9-6-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-23.

(Step S117-9-6-14)
In step S117-9-6-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the effect state third counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the effect state third counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-15.

(Step S117-9-6-15)
In step S117-9-6-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the remaining counter addition number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” that is the set number at the time of the second RT transition as the addition number in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-16.

(Step S117-9-6-16)
In step S117-9-6-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a target remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second instruction game second remaining counter and a second instruction game third remaining counter as addition target remaining counters in the subsequent addition upper limit confirmation process. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-17.

(Step S117-9-6-17)
In step S117-9-6-17, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described addition upper limit confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an addition process for the set remaining counter, an upper limit check process after the addition, and the like. Then, when step S117-9-6-17 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-18.

(Step S117-9-6-18)
In step S117-9-6-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “7” indicating “first instruction game” in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-19.

(Step S117-9-6-19)
In step S117-9-6-19, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the second instruction game first remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. And when it determines with the value of a 2nd instruction | indication game 1st remaining counter being "0" (step S117-9-6-19 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S117-9-6-20. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S117-9-6-19 = No), the bonus end time processing subroutine is terminated.

(Step S117-9-6-20)
In step S117-9-6-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an instruction game flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. If it is determined that the instruction game flag is on (step S117-9-6-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-22, and the instruction game flag is not on. Is determined (step S117-9-6-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-21.

(Step S117-9-6-21)
In step S117-9-6-21, the main CPU 301 performs the instruction state variable lottery process described above. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for the instruction state variable (mode). Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-22.

(Step S117-9-6-22)
In step S117-9-6-22, the main CPU 301 performs the above-described instruction game management type lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for the designated game management type. When the process of step S117-9-6-22 ends, the bonus end time processing subroutine ends.

(Step S117-9-6-23)
In step S117-9-6-23, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second instruction game second remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is “0” (step S117-9-6-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-25. When it is determined that the value of the second instruction game first remaining counter is not “0” (step S117-9-6-23 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-24. To do.

(Step S117-9-6-24)
In step S117-9-6-24, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game start time determination process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game start determination process, an instruction game initial setting process, and the like. When the process of step S117-9-6-24 is completed, the bonus end time subroutine is terminated.

(Step S117-9-6-25)
In step S117-9-6-25, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the next game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value “0” indicating “first normal” in the next game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-26.

(Step S117-9-6-26)
In step S117-9-6-26, the main CPU 301 performs an effect state third counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the performance state third counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S117-9-6-26 is completed, the bonus end time processing subroutine is terminated.

(Indication game start judgment process)
Next, based on FIG. 79, the instruction game start time determination process performed by the process of step S117-9-6-24 of FIG. 78 will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction game start time determination processing.

(Step S117-9-6-24-1)
In step S117-9-6-24-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the instruction game flag is off. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an instruction game flag provided in the main RAM 303 is off. If it is determined that the instruction game flag is OFF (step S117-9-6-24-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-24-2, and the instruction game flag is set. If it is determined that is not OFF (step S117-9-6-24-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9-6-24-3.

(Step S117-9-66-24-2)
In step S117-9-6-24-2, the main CPU 301 performs the aforementioned instruction game type determination process. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing at the time of instruction game type transition. When the process of step S117-9-6-24-2 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game start time determination process is ended.

(Step S117-9-6-24-3)
In step S117-9-6-24-3, the main CPU 301 performs the aforementioned instruction game initial setting process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game initial setting process and the like. Then, when the process of step S117-9-6-24-3 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game start time determination process is ended.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving various signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, and the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3” corresponding to the right reel 20 as the initial value of the reel number, and drives the right stepping motor 153 corresponding to the reel number “3”, thereby Rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. are performed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number, and drives the intermediate stepping motor 152 corresponding to the reel number “2”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the intermediate reel 19. Etc. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number and drives the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the reel number “1”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the left reel 18. Etc. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 30 and the like. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of the stored number display unit 15 and the payout number display unit 16, and based on the generated display data, the stored number display unit 15 and the payout number display unit 16. The process etc. which control are performed. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits a command having information on operable buttons (the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the MAXBET button 8) to the sub control board 400. Etc. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting various signals to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs input error check processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various error check commands. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(LED display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 81, the LED display process performed by the process of step S206 of FIG. 80 is demonstrated. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine of LED display processing.

(Step S206-1)
In step S <b> 206-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create the stored number indicator data. If the main CPU 301 determines that it is time to create the stored number indicator data (step S206-1 = Yes), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S206-2 to create the stored number indicator data. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S206-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-3.

(Step S206-2)
In step S206-2, the main CPU 301 performs LED data creation processing for the stored number indicator. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of the stored number display 15 (LED data output from the stored number display 15). Then, when the process of step S206-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-6.

(Step S206-3)
In step S206-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create the payout number display data. If the main CPU 301 determines that it is time to create the payout number display data (step S206-3 = Yes), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S206-4 to create the payout number display data. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S206-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-5.

(Step S206-4)
In step S <b> 206-4, the main CPU 301 performs payout number display LED data creation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 82. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of the payout number display 16 (LED data output from the payout number display 16). Then, when the process of step S206-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-6.

(Step S206-5)
In step S206-5, the main CPU 301 performs various LED data creation processing. Then, when the process of step S206-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-6.

(Step S206-6)
In step S206-6, the main CPU 301 performs LED data output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a data output control process for the stored number display 15, the payout number display 16, and the like based on the generated display data. When the process of step S206-6 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(LED data creation process for payout number display)
Next, based on FIG. 82, the payout number display LED data creation process performed by the process of step S206-4 of FIG. 81 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of LED data creation processing for the payout number display device.

(Step S206-4-1)
In step S <b> 206-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is an instruction information display LED data creation request. When it is determined that there is a request for creating instruction information display LED data (step S206-4-1 = Yes), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S206-4-2 to display instruction information display. When it is determined that there is no request for creating the LED data for use (step S206-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-4-3.

(Step S206-4-2)
In step S206-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction information display LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 converts the data designated in the “instruction display form” into “7-segment LED segment” output data, and creates display data on the payout number display unit 16. Then, when the process of step S206-4-2 is completed, the subroutine of LED data creation processing for the payout number indicator is ended, and the process proceeds to step S206-6 of the LED display process.

(Step S206-4-3)
In step S206-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number display LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 converts the data specified in the acquired number counter into “7-segment LED segment” output data, and performs processing for creating display data on the payout number display unit 16. When the process of step S206-4-3 is completed, the subroutine of LED data creation processing for the payout number display device is ended, and the process proceeds to step S206-6 of the LED display process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for checking an error in the sub RAM 403 and the like. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33 based on the sound data determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3 described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs LED control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the LED 32 based on the LED data determined by the LED data determination process in step S302-3-2 described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the image data determined by the image data determination process in step S302-3-4 described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button sensor 21s detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key sensor 22s detects an operation of the cross key 22. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main control board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 84, the main control board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 83 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main control board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command received last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the main control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main control board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 85, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 84 is demonstrated. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a command-by-command process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs LED data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the LED data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determination process mentioned later. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determination process mentioned later. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process described later. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing by command)
Next, based on FIG. 86, the command-by-command processing performed by the processing in step S302-3-1 in FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a reliability command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a reliability command. As described above, the reliability command includes information on the second gaming state. If it is determined that the received command is a reliability command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is selected. If it is determined that the command is not an area command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a second gaming state reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the reliability command from the main control board 300 and information on the stop control number. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a display command. If it is determined that the received command is a display command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is a display command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs display command reception processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process according to the display command received from the main control board 300, the “state”, and the stop control number information. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-1-7)
In step S302-3-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a command reception process corresponding to the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. For example, when receiving a state command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 stores a value corresponding to “state” specified by information included in the state command in the state storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 401 performs an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like based on the set effect determination table, display operation order designation information, or the like based on the command received from the main control board 300. Perform the decision process. When the process of step S302-3-1-8 ends, the subroutine for each command process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when receiving the second gaming state)
Next, based on FIG. 87, the 2nd game state reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2 of FIG. 86 is demonstrated. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second game state reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second gaming state is “BB inside”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second gaming state is a value “7” indicating “inside BB” based on the received reliability command information. That is, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not “BB1”, “BB2”, and “BB3” are rounded “inside BB” by the main CPU 301. If it is determined that the second gaming state is “inside BB” (step S302-3-1-2-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-12. If it is determined that the value of the second gaming state is not “inside BB” (step S302-3-1-2-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-15. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus notified flag is off. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus notified flag provided in the sub RAM 403 is off. That is, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus notification effect has not been performed yet. If it is determined that the bonus notification flag is off (step S302-3-1-2-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-13, and the bonus notification is made. If it is determined that the completed flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus non-notification effect determination table. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a bonus non-notification effect determination table as an effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1-8 of the above-described command-specific process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-13 ends, the subroutine for the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting an effect determination table for bonus notification. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a bonus notification-determined effect determination table as an effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1-8 of the above-described command-specific process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-14 ends, the subroutine of the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether the second gaming state is any one of “BB1”, “BB2”, and “BB3”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the second gaming state is “1” indicating “BB1”, “2” indicating “BB2”, “BB3” based on the received reliability command information. A process of determining whether or not the value is any one of the values “3” indicating “” is performed. If it is determined that the second gaming state is “BB1”, “BB2”, or “BB3” (step S302-3-1-2-15 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-16 and it is determined that the value of the second gaming state is not “BB1”, “BB2”, or “BB3” (step S302-3-1-2) 15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the bonus type notification flag is off. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus type notification flag provided in the sub RAM 403 is off. That is, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus type notification effect has not been performed yet. If it is determined that the bonus type notification flag is off (step S302-3-1-2-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-17, and the bonus is notified. When it is determined that the type notification completion flag is not off (step S302-3-1-2-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus type non-notification effect determination table. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a bonus type non-notification effect determination table as an effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1-8 of the above-described command-specific process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-17 ends, the subroutine of the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus type notified effect determination table. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a bonus type-notified effect determination table as an effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1-8 of the above-described process for each command. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-18 ends, the subroutine of the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-by-command process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting an effect determination table corresponding to each state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects and sets a predetermined effect determination table according to the state as an effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1-8 of the above-described process for each command. Process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-19 ends, the subroutine for the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Process when receiving display command)
Next, based on FIG. 88, the display command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4 of FIG. 86 will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of display command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a display command indicating “design display related to BB” has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the display command received from the main control board 300 is a display command indicating “symbol display related to BB”. If it is determined that the received command is a display command indicating “symbol display relating to BB” (step S302-3-4-1 = Yes), step S302-3-4-1-4- If the received command is not a display command indicating “symbol display related to BB” (step S302-3-1-1 = No), step S302-3 is performed. The process is shifted to -1--4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the bonus notification flag and the bonus type notification flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the bonus notified flag provided in the sub RAM 403 to OFF and setting the bonus type notified flag provided in the sub RAM 403 to OFF. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command reception process corresponding to the received display command. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-4 ends, the subroutine of the display command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Sub effect determination process)
Next, based on FIG. 89, the sub effect determination process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-8 of FIG. 86 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a sub effect determination process subroutine.

(Step S302-3-1-8-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining an effect (sub effect) based on the set effect determination table. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining an effect such as displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the effect determination table provided in the sub ROM 402 set in the above-described second game state reception process or the like. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8-2.

(Step S302-3-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not it is at the time of receiving a reliability command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a reliability command. If it is determined that the command is received (step S302-3-8-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8, and the reliability is If it is determined that the command is not received (step S302-3-8-1-2 = No), the sub-effect determining process subroutine is terminated, the command-specific process subroutine is also terminated, and the command analysis process is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-1-8-3)
In step S302-3-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus notified flag is off. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus notified flag provided in the sub RAM 403 is off. If it is determined that the bonus notification flag is off (step S302-3-1-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8-4, and the bonus notification is made. If it is determined that the completed flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8-6.

(Step S302-3-1-8-4)
In step S302-3-1-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus notification effect has been determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus winning finalized effect has been determined in the effect determining process in step S302-3-8-1-1. The determination of the bonus notification effect is not limited to the bonus winning finalization effect, but may be a bonus suggestion effect determination. In this case, a bonus suggestion level (certainty of winning a bonus) as a determination criterion may be set in advance. And when it determines with having determined the bonus alerting | reporting effect (step S302-3-1-8-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-8-1-8-5 and performs a bonus alerting | reporting effect. If it is determined that it has not been determined (step S302-3-1-8-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8-6.

(Step S302-3-1-8-5)
In step S302-3-1-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the bonus notified flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus informed flag provided in the sub RAM 403 to ON. When the process of step S302-3-1-8-5 ends, the sub-effect determination process subroutine ends, the command-specific process subroutine also ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-1-8-6)
In step S302-3-1-8-6, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the bonus type notification flag is off. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus type notification flag provided in the sub RAM 403 is off. If it is determined that the bonus type notification flag is off (step S302-3-8-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8-7, and the bonus is notified. If it is determined that the type notification flag is not off (step S302-3-1-8-6 = No), the sub-effect determining process subroutine is terminated, the command-specific process subroutine is also terminated, and the command The process proceeds to step S302-3-2 in the analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-8-7)
In step S302-3-1-8-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus type notification effect has been determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a notification effect of the selected bonus type has been determined in the effect determination process of step S302-3-1-1-8-1. Note that the type determination of the bonus type effect may be performed at a predetermined level as in the case of the bonus winning finalized effect. And when it determines with having determined the bonus kind alerting | reporting effect (step S302-3-1-8-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-8-8, and a bonus kind alert | report If it is determined that the effect has not been determined (step S302-3-1-8-7 = No), the sub effect determination process subroutine is terminated, the command-specific process subroutine is also terminated, and the command analysis process is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-1-8-8)
In step S302-3-1-8-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the bonus type notified flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus type notified flag provided in the sub RAM 403 to ON. When the process of step S302-3-1-8-8 ends, the sub effect determination process subroutine ends, the command-specific process subroutine also ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process. Transition.

(Timing chart showing an example of display and transmission information when winning BB)
Next, FIG. 90 shows a timing chart of display on the payout number display 16 at the time of BB winning and information transmission from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400.

(When BB is won)
First, when winning the BB, the value of the production state second counter is “0” at this time, so the production state second counter <the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-26 = NO in FIG. 46). Thus, the second gaming state is set to “inside BB” (step S108-28 in FIG. 46), and this information is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 (step S108-29 in FIG. 46).

  That is, only the value (hereinafter referred to as “BB winning information”) indicating that “the second gaming state value is inside” (hereinafter referred to as BB winning information) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400, and “BB1” to “BB3”. "(Hereinafter referred to as BB type information) indicating any of" In the sub-control board 400, only the effect related to the BB winning can be performed based on this information. Also, since only the BB winning information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, even if this transmission information is obtained illegally, the BB type information is not obtained, and “BB1” to “BB” It is not specified which one is “BB3”. The production state second counter is set to “0” in the BB winning game, and is incremented by “1” from the next game (step S109-4-21-7 in FIG. 56).

  Further, since the production state second counter <the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-31-7 = YES in FIG. 47), the instruction monitor display information acquisition process (step S108-31-8 in FIG. 47). ), The instruction type setting process (step S108-31-9 in FIG. 47) is not performed, and the bonus information is not displayed on the payout number display unit 16. In the present embodiment, when the value of the performance state second counter is less than the bonus type notification determination number “7”, the bonus information is not displayed on the payout number display 16. , BB type may not be displayed, and only information indicating BB winning may be displayed. In this case, when the production state second counter <bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-31-7 = YES in FIG. 47), BB winning information (bonus rounding information) is set, and the number of payouts The BB winning information may be displayed on the display 16.

  Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 91, an effect indicating that the bonus has been confirmed can be performed. However, at this stage, the player does not know the type of bonus, that is, which symbol combination (Red Seven BB, Blue Seven BB, Yellow Seven BB) should be aligned, and the bonus symbol may not be aligned. is there.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 92, the fact that the bonus has been confirmed may not be displayed. Furthermore, the number of games for which the bonus confirmation display is performed can be arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, each game is selected in the sub-effect determining process.

  Further, the BB winning information may not be transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 until the BB type information is transmitted. In this case, for example, if the production state second counter <the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-26 = NO in FIG. 46), the bonus information is not set in the second production state storage area. Good. As a result, the BB winning information is not transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, and an effect indicating that the bonus is confirmed on the sub side is not performed. In this case, since the BB winning information is not transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, even if the transmission information is obtained illegally, the BB winning information is not known.

(When the game progresses for the number of bonus type notifications)
Next, when a game corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number “7” progresses from the BB winning game (the eighth game including the BB winning game), the BB (“BB1” to “BB3” in which the second gaming state is won. ”(Step S108-26 = YES in FIG. 46) and transmitted to the sub-control board 400 (step S108-29 in FIG. 46). That is, the BB type information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. With this information, the sub-control board 400 can produce an effect related to the bonus type. In this embodiment, the BB winning information is not transmitted when the BB type information is transmitted. However, the BB winning information may be transmitted when the BB type information is transmitted.

  In addition, since the production state second counter ≧ the bonus type notification determination number “7” (step S108-31-7 = NO in FIG. 47), the instruction monitor display information acquisition process (step S108-31-8 in FIG. 47). ), Any one of “10”, “11”, and “12” is acquired as the instruction type by the instruction type setting process (step S108-31-9 in FIG. 47). Then, the instruction type is converted into the instruction display form (any one of “40”, “50”, and “60”) by the instruction display form acquisition process (step S108-32 in FIG. 46), and the payout number display 16 Is set (step S108-33 in FIG. 46), and display on the payout number display 16 is performed.

  Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 93, an effect indicating the BB type can be performed. Thereby, the player can operate BB by pushing a specific bonus symbol.

  The notification of the BB type may not be performed immediately after the reception of the BB type information. For example, from the reception of the BB type information, a BB type notification effect may be performed after a predetermined game, or after receiving the BB type information, whether to notify every game may be selected. Furthermore, the number of games for transmitting the BB type information from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 may not be the “7th” game from the BB winning.

(Continuous production process)
Next, in the sub control board 400, the process in the case of performing a continuous production until BB type information is received will be described. Note that the continuous effect refers to, for example, an effect of performing related effects across a plurality of games.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 94, the following processing is added before the processing of S302-3-1-2-11 in the second gaming state reception processing of FIG. 87.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1)
That is, in step S302-3-2-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of continuous effect games is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of continuous effect games provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a continuous effect is being performed. The number of continuous effect games is set when the continuous effect is determined in the sub effect determination process. Further, the continuous effect is set so that the number of games of the continuous effect is not larger than the number of bonus type notification determinations. That is, the continuous production is completed with the number of games within the bonus type notification determination number. And when it determines with the number of continuous production games being "0" (step S302-3-2-1-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-2, When it is determined that the number of continuous effect games is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a corresponding continuous effect determination table. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which sets the continuous production | presentation determination table determined in the sub production | presentation determination process with the game before the last time. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting the number of continuous effect games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of continuous effect games provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-3 ends, the subroutine of the second gaming state reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when a continuous effect is selected when a bonus is won, for example, a victory effect of a teammate character is performed in the final game of the continuous effect (see FIG. 95D). Next, a bonus winning notification is made (see FIG. 95E). On the other hand, if the bonus is not won and the continuous effect is selected, for example, in the final game of the continuous effect, the defeat effect of the teammate character is performed (see FIG. 95 (F)), and the process ends.

(Lotted number of games before sending bonus type)
Next, processing in the case where the number of games until the bonus type is transmitted will be described.
In this case, the bonus type notification determination number is determined by lottery when BB is won. Only the points different from the above embodiment will be described below.

(Design code setting process)
Based on FIG. 96 and FIG. 97, the difference from the symbol code setting process in FIG. 44 and FIG. 46 will be described. 96 and 97 are diagrams showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

  In the symbol code setting process, the process of step S108-7a is added between the process of step S108-7 and the process of step S108-8. Moreover, the process of step S108-25a to the process of step S108-25e is added between the process of step S108-25 and the process of step S108-26.

(Step S108-7a)
In step S108-7a, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the BB winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” in the BB winning flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-7a ends, the process proceeds to step S108-8.

(Step S108-25a)
In step S108-25a, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB winning flag is on. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a BB winning flag provided in the main RAM 303 is on. When it is determined that the BB winning flag is on (step S108-25a = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-25b, and when it is determined that the BB winning flag is not on ( Step S108-25a = No), the process proceeds to Step S108-26.

(Step S108-25b)
In step S108-25b, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the bonus type notification determination number by lottery for determining the number of games until the notification of the winning BB type is permitted. Then, when the process of step S108-25b ends, the process proceeds to step S108-25c.

(Step S108-25c)
In step S108-25c, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the determined number of games as the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of games determined as the bonus type notification determination number in the lottery process in the bonus type notification determination number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-25c ends, the process proceeds to step S108-25d.

(Step S108-25d)
In step S108-25d, the main CPU 301 performs a type notification determination number command transmission set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the type notification determination number command including information on the bonus type notification determination number in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit to the sub control board 400. I do. Then, when the process of step S108-25d is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-25e.

(Step S108-25e)
In step S108-25e, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the BB winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in the BB winning flag provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-25e ends, the process proceeds to step S108-26.

(Processing by command)
Based on FIG. 98, differences from the command-by-command processing in FIG. 86 will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

  In the command-by-command processing, between the processing at step S302-3-1-1-4 and the processing at step S302-3-7-1-7, the processing at step S302-3-5-1-5 and step S302-3-1-1 are performed. 6 processing is added.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a type notification determination number command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a type notification determination number command. If it is determined that the received command is a type notification determination number command (step S302-3-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6, and the received command Is determined not to be a type notification determination number command (step S302-3-1-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a type notification determination number command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the bonus type notification determination number received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Process when receiving type notification judgment number command)
Next, based on FIG. 99, the type notification determination number command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-6 of FIG. 98 will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing upon reception of a type notification determination number command.

(Step S302-3-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the bonus type notification determination number. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a bonus type notification determination number in a bonus type notification determination number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 based on the received type notification determination number command. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-6-2.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for limiting the effect determination table. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of limiting the effect determination table used in the sub effect determination process based on the set bonus type notification determination number. Here, the limitation of the effect determination table is to select only effects that are completed with the number of games within the bonus type notification determination number, even if effects that are related across multiple games such as continuous effects are performed. To do. Since the effect determination table is set in the second game state reception process (step S302-3-1-2) or the like, the effect determination table used at this time may be limited. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-2 ends, the subroutine for the type notification determination number command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

  As described above, when the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins BB (any one of “BB1” to “BB3”), the number-of-payout indicator is displayed until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed. 16 does not display the BB type, and only the BB winning information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. In the sub-control board 400, only the BB winning information can be received and the BB type information cannot be received until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notifications has passed since the BB winning. Note that the sub-control board 400 can execute an effect based on the BB winning information until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has elapsed from the BB winning by receiving the BB winning information.

  When the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notifications has passed since BB winning, the BB type is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the BB type information is displayed from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. Sent. In the sub-control board 400, when the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has passed since the BB winning, BB type information can be received and a corresponding effect can be performed. As described above, the sub-control board 400 can receive the BB type information after the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, and can perform an effect based on the type of BB.

Thereby, a player can be made to play a predetermined game after the BB is won and before the grasp of the BB type, and the interest can be improved. Since only the BB winning information is transmitted until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has passed since the BB winning, even if this information is obtained illegally, the BB type is not acquired.
Hereinafter, various cases will be described.

(Case A)
Only the BB winning information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has elapsed since the BB winning. The payout number display 16 does not display BB information. In this case, the payout number display 16 may display only BB winning information (bonus rounding information). Further, the transmission of the BB winning information may be performed after a predetermined number of games, not immediately after the BB winning.

(Case B)
When the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, the BB type information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. The payout number display 16 displays the BB type information together with the transmission of the BB type information. In this case, only the BB winning information may be transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has elapsed from the BB winning. The winning information itself may not be transmitted. Further, the transmission of the BB type information may be performed not after the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed but after a predetermined number of games.

(Case C)
Only the BB winning information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has elapsed since the BB winning. When the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, the BB type information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. The transmission of the BB winning information may not be performed immediately after the BB winning, and the transmission of the BB type information may not be performed immediately after the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed.

(Case D)
At the time of winning the BB, the number of games until the BB type information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 is determined by lottery. In this case, only the BB winning information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number determined from the BB winning has elapsed. When the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, the BB type information is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400.

(Case E)
The sub control board 400 receives only the BB winning information from the main control board 300 until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has passed since the BB winning. Thereby, the sub CPU 401 performs the BB winning effect (the type of BB cannot be specified) until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number elapses after the BB winning. In this case, the BB winning effect may not be performed. The reception of the BB winning information is not limited to the BB winning game, but may be received from a predetermined game from the BB winning until the number of bonus type notification determination times has elapsed. The BB winning information may be received only once or every game from the first reception.

(Case F)
The sub-control board 400 receives the BB type information from the main control board 300 after the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has passed since the BB win. Thus, the sub CPU 401 performs an effect that can specify the type of BB after the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has elapsed since the BB win. In this case, BB winning information (BB type cannot be specified) may not be received until the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations has passed since BB winning. If the BB winning information is not received between the BB winning and the number of games corresponding to the number of bonus type notification determinations, the sub CPU 401 does not (but cannot) perform an effect related to the BB winning.

(Case G)
The sub-control board 400 receives only the BB winning information from the main control board 300 until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, and the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number from the BB winning is the number of games. After that, BB type information is received from the main control board 300. Thereby, the sub CPU 401 performs the BB winning effect (the type of the BB cannot be specified) until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, and the bonus type notification determination number from the BB winning is determined. After the number of games has elapsed, an effect that can specify the type of BB is performed. Therefore, various effects can be performed from BB winning to BB type notification, and the interest can be improved.

(Case G)
The sub-control board 400 does not receive the BB type information from the main control board 300 until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed from the BB winning, and receives only the BB winning information and performs the continuous effect. . Thereby, the sub CPU 401 can perform the BB winning effect before the notification of the BB type, and can improve the interest.

(Case H)
The sub control board 400 receives from the main control board 300 the number of games until the BB type information determined by the lottery is received = “the number of bonus type notification determinations”. Then, the sub CPU 401 performs a predetermined effect related to the BB winning until the number of games corresponding to the bonus type notification determination number has elapsed. Thereby, a prelude effect, a continuous effect, etc. can be performed at an appropriate timing, and an interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the “1” game indicates a unit game, and for example, the value of the normal game number counter indicates the number of unit games. In the present embodiment, the medal is an example of the game value of the present application, and the acquisition of the medal is an example of the predetermined privilege of the present application.
In the present embodiment, “red BB”, “blue BB”, “yellow BB” (“BB”) are examples of the special winning combination of the present application, and “internal state” is the special state of the present application. As an example.
In the present embodiment, the “bonus type notification determination number” is an example of the type non-notification game number of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, “between the BB winning and the number of bonus type notification determination games” is an example of “between a predetermined number of games since the determination of the special winning combination” and “bonus type notification” “After the determination number of games has elapsed” is an example of “after a predetermined number of games has elapsed” in the present application. In the present embodiment, BB winning information (a value indicating that the value of the second gaming state indicates “inside of BB”) in which the BB type cannot be specified is an example of the special winning combination winning information of the present application. .

In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 constitutes the main control means of the present application, and the sub control board 400 constitutes the sub control means of the present application.
In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a plurality of reels of the present application.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start switch 10sw constitutes the start operation detecting means of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a winning combination determining unit of the present application.
Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301, the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 constitute the symbol variation means of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw constitute stop operation detection means of the present application.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of symbols arranged on the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the winning combination and the stop operation position. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes stop control means of the present application.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes the determination means of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a privilege grant unit of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 303 constitutes a winning combination information storage unit of the present application.
Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a state transition unit of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a winning combination information control unit of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes information transmission means of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout number display device 16 constitutes the winning combination information display means of the present application.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 constitutes the effect control means of the present application. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 constitutes information receiving means of the present application.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present application includes a winning combination information display unit that displays information related to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining unit.
The winning combination information display means,
If any of the special winning combinations is determined by the winning combination determining means, it is determined that one of the multiple types of special winning combinations has been determined for a predetermined number of games since the determination of the special winning combination. Display the special winning combination winning information shown,
Information indicating the determined type of the special winning combination may be displayed after the predetermined number of games has elapsed.

In the gaming machine, the winning combination information display means is
If any of the special winning combinations is determined by the winning combination determining means, the determined winning combination information is displayed instead of displaying the special winning combination winning information during the predetermined number of games since the determination of the special winning combination. Without displaying information indicating the type of special winning role,
Information indicating the determined type of the special winning combination may be displayed after the predetermined number of games has elapsed.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 keyhole 6 medal slot 7 BET lever 7 sw lever switch 8 MAXBET button 8 sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9 sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10 sw start switch 11 left stop button 11 sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Selector 14s Selector sensor 15 Stored number display 16 Discharged number display 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 21s Production button sensor 22 cross key 22s cross key sensor 23 display window 24 saucer unit 25 medal payout opening 30 external concentration terminal board 31 liquid crystal display 32 LED
33 Speaker 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 Power board 201 Power button 201sw Power switch 202 Hopper 202s Hopper sensor 300 Main control Board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 500 Production control board 501 Production control CPU
502 Production control ROM
503 Production control RAM
504 CGROM
505 Sound source IC
506 Sound source ROM
507 VDP

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each peripheral surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation;
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to detect a stop operation;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means for controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means by one-way communication;
A gaming machine equipped with
The main control means includes
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
A symbol changing means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means;
Stop control means for performing stop control of the symbol variably displayed by the symbol varying means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means;
Determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed based on all of the plurality of symbols being stopped by the stop control means;
When it is determined by the determination means that a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed, a privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege;
When the special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the winning combination information for storing the information related to the special winning combination until the determining unit determines that the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination is displayed. Storage means;
A state transition means for transitioning from a normal state to a special state advantageous to a player when it is determined by the determination means that a combination of symbols relating to the special winning combination is displayed;
Information transmitting means for transmitting information related to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means to the sub-control means;
With
The sub-control means is
Information receiving means for receiving information transmitted to the information transmitting means;
Production control means for producing an effect based on the information received by the information receiving means;
With
The winning combination determining means is
From among the winning combinations including a plurality of types of the special winning combinations, one of the winning combinations is determined,
The information transmitting means includes
If any of the special winning combinations is determined by the winning combination determining means, the determined value is determined until the predetermined number of games elapses from the determination of the special winning combination to the sub-control means. Without sending information indicating the type of special winning combination, sending special winning combination winning information indicating that one of the multiple types of special winning combinations has been determined,
The production control means includes
When the special winning combination winning information is received by the information receiving means, a continuous effect of performing related effects across a plurality of unit games is executed so as to be completed before the predetermined number of games elapses. A gaming machine characterized by the ability to